Dynabook UPA3539WL Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG User Manual Manual

Toshiba Corporation Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG Manual

Contents

User Manual

User’s ManualPORTÉGÉ M700/M710
User’s Manual iiTable of ContentsCopyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viDisclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viTrademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viFCC information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiEU Conformity Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiiVCCI Class B Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiiModem warning notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiiJapan regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ixInstructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiNotes for Users in Australia and New Zealand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiFollowing information is only for EU-member states: . . . . . . . . . . . xviDescription on Laser specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviPrefaceConventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiGeneral PrecautionsCreating a computer-friendly environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxStress injury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxHeat injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiPressure or impact damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiPC Card overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiMobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiInstruction Manual for Safety and Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiChapter 1 Getting StartedEquipment checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3System Recovery Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Chapter 2 The Grand TourFront with the display closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Left side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
User’s Manual iiiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Front with the display open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Chapter 3 Hardware, Utilities and OptionsHardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6TOSHIBA Value Added Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9TOSHIBA Tablet PC Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Utilities and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Optional devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Bridge media slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Chapter 4 Operating BasicsPointing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Using the Tablet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Web Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Changing Ultra Slim Bay modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Using optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Media care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50Computer Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Heat dispersal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Chapter 5 The KeyboardTypewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Soft keys: FN key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Generating ASCII characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Chapter 6 Power and Power-Up ModesPower conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Monitoring of power condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
User’s Manual ivPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5TOSHIBA Password Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Tablet mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Power-up modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19System Auto Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Chapter 7 HW Setup & BIOS SetupAccessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1BIOS Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Chapter 8 TroubleshootingProblem solving process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Appendix A SpecificationsPhysical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Appendix B Display Controller and Video modeDisplay controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Appendix C AT CommandsAppendix D S-registersS-register values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1AT command set result codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5Appendix E V.90V.90 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1AT Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3Appendix F Wireless LANCard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1Radio Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2Supported Frequency Sub-bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3Appendix G Intel® Matrix Storage ManagerManually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . . . G-2How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP or Windows Vista®: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3Appendix H Bluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityBluetooth wireless technology and your Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3Regulatory statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3Using Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan. . . H-6
User’s Manual vPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Appendix I AC Power Cord and ConnectorsCertification agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1Appendix J TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection TimerAppendix K Legal FootnotesNon-applicable Icons*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1CPU*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1Memory (Main System)*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2Battery Life*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3LCD*6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3Wireless LAN*8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4Images*10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4GlossaryIndex
User’s Manual viPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Copyright© 2007 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.TOSHIBA PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer User’s ManualFirst edition November 2007Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in making any reproduction from this manual.DisclaimerThis manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer at the time of this manual’s production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the manual.TrademarksIBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.Windows, Microsoft and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA under license.InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of InterVideo Inc.Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.Memory Stick and i.LINK are trademark and registered trademark of Sony Corporation.Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used in this manual.
User’s Manual viiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710FCC informationFCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:■Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.■Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.■Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.■Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.FCC conditionsThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.ContactAddress: TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.9740 Irvine BoulevardIrvine, California 92618-1697Telephone: (949) 583-3000Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external devices and the computer’s external monitor port, Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) ports, i.LINK (IEEE1394) port and microphone jack. Changes or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
User’s Manual viiiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710EU Conformity StatementThis product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and/or R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.The complete official EU CE Declaration can be obtained on following internet page:http://epps.toshiba-teg.com/VCCI Class B InformationModem warning noticeConformity StatementThe equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision "CTR21"] for pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point.Responsible for CE-marking: TOSHIBA EUROPE GMBH, Hammfelddamm 8, 41460 Neuss, Germany.Manufacturer: Toshiba Corporation, 1-1 Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 105-8001, JapanThis information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.
User’s Manual ixPORTÉGÉ M700/M710In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance.Network Compatibility StatementThis product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional requirements conditional in EG 201 121.Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network, please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific function on specific national networks can be given.Japan regulationsRegion selectionIf you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other selection.RedialUp to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are made, the modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing problems with the Black Listed code, set the interval between redials at one minute or longer. Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on analogue telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three minutes.The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for Telecommunications Equipment.Germany ATAAB AN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010 and DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17Greece ATAAB AN005,AN006 and GR01,02,03,04Portugal ATAAB AN001,005,006,007,011 and P03,04,08,10Spain ATAAB AN005,007,012, and ES01Switzerland ATAAB AN002All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003,004A05-0413001
User’s Manual xPORTÉGÉ M700/M710This label is located on the module.Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone company and give them the following information:■The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem■The registration number that is located on the deviceThe FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the computer outside of the main system label.■The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary. For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RJ11C.Type of serviceYour modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request.
User’s Manual xiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Telephone company proceduresThe goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.If problems ariseIf any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.DisconnectionIf you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this change.Fax brandingThe Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual. In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.
User’s Manual xiiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe systems, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to the following:The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary. For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.Canada: 4005B-DELPHIUsers should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
User’s Manual xiiiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Notes for Users in Australia and New ZealandModem warning notice for AustraliaModems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region selection is set to Australia. The use of other country/region setting while the modem is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem being operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the country/region is correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the currently active setting. To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following command sequence:AT%TE=1ATS133=1AT&FAT&WAT%TE=0ATZFailure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner. Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of non-permitted equipment.Notes for use of this device in New Zealand■The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be reported as a fault to Telecom.■In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work properly if:a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and.b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application at the other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires suitable software in addition to a modem.■This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
User’s Manual xivPORTÉGÉ M700/M710■Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, andb/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next.c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5 seconds apart.■Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.■The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as follows:ATB0 (CCITT operation)AT&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone)AT&P1 (Decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)ATS0=0 (not auto answer)ATS6=4 (Blind dial delay)ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factorydefault of 15 recommended)ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration=90 ms)ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)■When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a value of 3 or 4. This ensures:■a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been successfully switched through the network.■caller identification information (which occurs between the first and second ring cadences) is not destroyed.■The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing” standard.Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be entered normally.
User’s Manual xvPORTÉGÉ M700/M710■The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if the phone performance is impaired.■It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the Telecom line during electrical storms.■When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.■This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert cadences and services such as FaxAbility.NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOMGeneral conditionsAs required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any changes to the specifications of these products which might affect compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without Telecom approval.A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions on format, size and color on the attached sheet.The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be legitimately connected to the Telecom network.The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each variation when submitted at the same time as the original.An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.
User’s Manual xviPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Following information is only for EU-member states:Description on Laser specificationThe optical disc drive such as DVD Super Multi drive that is used in this computer is equipped with laser. The classification label with the following sentence is affixed to the surface of the drive.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCTLASER KLASSE 1LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEAPPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1KLASS 1 LASER APPARATThe drive with the above label is certified by the manufacturer that the drive complies with the requirement for laser product on the date of manufacturing pursuant to article 21 of Code of Federal Regulations by the United States of America, Department of Health & Human Services, Food and Drug Administration.In other countries, the drive is certified to comply with the requirement pursuant to IEC 60825-1 and EN 60825-1 on class 1 laser product.This computer is equipped with the optical disc drive in the following list according to the model.The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.This symbol may not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. Manufacturer Type Panasonic UJ-852 Panasonic UJ-862
User’s Manual xviiPrefaceCongratulations on your purchase of the PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 series computer. This powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion capability, includes multimedia functionality, and is designed to provide years of reliable, high-performance computing.This manual tells how to set up and begin using your PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 computer. It also provides detailed information on configuring your computer, basic operations and care, using optional devices and troubleshooting. If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing, first read over the Chapter 1, Getting Started and Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options chapters to familiarize yourself with the computer’s features, components and accessory devices. Then read Chapter 1, Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your computer.If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to read the Special features section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options to learn about features that are uncommon or unique to this computer, as well as the section on Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup, to understand how to setup and configure these features.Read Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options if connecting optional products or external devices.ConventionsThis manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and operating procedures.AbbreviationsOn first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.
User’s Manual xviiiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710IconsIcons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information on.KeysThe keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they appear on the keyboard. For example, ENTER identifies the ENTER key.Key operationSome operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign (+). For example, CTRL + C means you must hold down CRTL and at the same time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.DisplayMessagesMessages are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.ABC When procedures require an action such as clicking an icon or entering text, the icon's name or the text you are to type in is represented in the typeface you see to the left.SABC Names of windows or icons or text generated by the computer that appear on its display screen are presented in the type face you see to the left.Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your equipment.Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of your equipment.Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.
User’s Manual xixPORTÉGÉ M700/M710TerminologyThis term is defined in this document as follows:Start The word "Start" refers to the " " button in Microsoft® Windows Vista®.
User’s Manual xxGeneral PrecautionsTOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the computer.Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions included in the text of the manual.Creating a computer-friendly environmentPlace the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer and any other items you are using, such as a printer.Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat.To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area from:■Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.■Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the computer) or speakerphones.■Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.■Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.■Liquids and corrosive chemicals.Stress injuryCarefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort also includes information on work space design, posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.
User’s Manual xxiPORTÉGÉ M700/M710Heat injury■Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your skin might suffer a low-heat injury.■If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can become hot.■The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.■Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the material could become damaged.Pressure or impact damageDo not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise cause it to malfunction.PC Card overheatingSome PC Cards can become hot during prolonged use which may result in errors or instability in the operation of the device in question. In addition, you should also be careful when you remove a PC Card that has been used for a long time.Mobile phonesPlease be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.Instruction Manual for Safety and ComfortAll important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be sure to read it before using the computer.
User’s Manual 1-1Chapter 1Getting StartedThis chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to start using your computer.Equipment checklistCarefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging materials for future use.HardwareCheck to make sure you have all the following items:■PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer■AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)■Battery pack (Is pre-installed in some computers)■Slice Expansion Battery (Is included with some models)■Tablet PC Pen (Is included with some models)■Reserve Pen (Is included with some models)■Ultra Slim Bay Weight Saver (Is included with some models)■Ultra Slim Bay Case (Is provided with some models)Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA.■For some models, Tablet PC Pen is included together with spare pen tips and a tip removal tool in the small case coming with the product.■For some models, Reserve Pen is included in the small case coming with the product.
User’s Manual 1-2Getting StartedDocumentation■PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Series User Information Guide■Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort■End User License AgreementIf any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately.SoftwareThe following Windows® operating system and utility software are pre-installed.■Microsoft® Windows Vista®■TOSHIBA Value Added Package■Recovery Disc Creator■DVD Video Player■TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities■TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility■CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer■TOSHIBA Assist■TOSHIBA ConfigFree■TOSHIBA HDD Protection■TOSHIBA Disc Creator■TOSHIBA Tablet PC Extension■TOSHIBA Tablet Access Code Logon Utility■Fingerprint Utility■Windows Mobility Center■Online Manual■PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 User's Manual (This manual)
User’s Manual 1-3Getting StartedGetting StartedThis section provides basic information to start using your computer. It covers the following topics:■About the Tablet mode■Connecting the AC adaptor■Opening the display■Turning on the power■Starting up for the first time■Turning off the power■Restarting the computer■Creating Optical Recovery Discs■Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk drive■Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery DiscsAbout the Tablet modeChange to "The TOSHIBA PORTÉGÉ M700/M710" computer can be used in two ways, as an ordinary laptop PC and as a Tablet PC. You can use the computer as Tablet PC, operated with the supplied Tablet PC Pen, by turning the display panel through 180 degrees and closing it. This manual calls the use as an ordinary laptop PC "Laptop mode", and the use as a Tablet PC "Tablet mode". Refer to Changing to the Tablet mode section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for details on changing the mode.■All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.■Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your hand, arms, shoulders or neck.■Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.■Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting destroys all stored data.■It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk drive or other main storage device to external media. General storage media is not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain conditions may result in data loss.■Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result in the loss of data.
User’s Manual 1-4Getting StartedConnecting the AC adaptorAttach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from battery power.The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100 to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.■Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor.■Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.■Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.■The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.■Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.■When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.■Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface, furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in temperature during normal use.■Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface that is resistant to heat damage.Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions.
User’s Manual 1-5Getting Started1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.Figure 1-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)Figure 1-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the back of the computer.Figure 1-3 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the Battery and DC INindicators on the front of the computer should glow.Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer depending on the model.DC IN 15V jackDC output plug
User’s Manual 1-6Getting StartedOpening the displayThe display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal viewing.While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body of the computer is not raised, slowly lift the display panel - this will allow the angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity.Figure 1-4 Opening the display panelDisplay panelUse reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel. Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.■Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.■Do not press or push on the display panel.■Do not lift the computer by the display panel.■Do not close the display panel with pens or any other objects left in between the display panel and the keyboard.■When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force when opening or closing the display panel).
User’s Manual 1-7Getting StartedTurning on the powerThis section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will then indicate the status. Please refer to the Monitoring of power conditionsection in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information.1. Open the display panel.2. Slide the Power Button Lock Switch to the right.3. Press and hold the computer's power button for two or three seconds.Figure 1-5 Turning on the powerStarting up for the first timeThe Microsoft Windows Vista® Startup Screen will be the first screen displayed when you turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on each screen in order to properly install the operating system.Turning off the powerThe power can be turned off in one of three modes, either Shut Down (Boot) Mode, Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode.Shut Down mode (Boot Mode)When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode no data will be saved and the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time it is turned on.1. If you have entered data, either save it to the hard disk drive or to other storage media.2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the CD/DVD or floppy diskette.■After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you have set up the operating system. Please refer to the section Starting up for the first time for more information.■Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.Power buttonPower Button Lock SwitchWhen it is displayed, be sure to read the Software License Termscarefully.
User’s Manual 1-8Getting Started3. Click Start.4. Click the arrow button ( ) located in the power management buttons ( ) and select Shut Down from the menu.5. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.Sleep ModeIf you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.■Make sure the Hard Disk Drive and Ultra Slim Bay's moduleindicator is off. If you turn off the power while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you may lose data or damage the disk.■Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could cause loss of data.■Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data loss.Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait a short period to avoid any potential damage.When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always completely shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless communication switches or devices, and canceling settings that reactivate the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to completely shut down the computer in this way could allow the operating system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved data, which could interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing serious injury.■Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.■Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in Sleep Mode. The computer or the memory module could be damaged.■Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode (unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in memory could be lost.
User’s Manual 1-9Getting StartedBenefits of Sleep ModeThe Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:■Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does the Hibernation Mode feature.■Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Sleep Mode feature.■Allows the use of the panel power off feature.Executing Sleep ModeYou can enter Sleep Mode in one of four ways:■Click Start then click the power button ( ) located in the power management buttons ( ).Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance-> Power Options).■Click Start then click the arrow button ( ) and select Sleep from the menu.■Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).■Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).■When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, Start-> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).■To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and hold the power button or any key on the keyboard for a short amount of time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up on Keyboard option is enabled within the HW Setup utility.■If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.■To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode, disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).However, please be aware that this configuration will nullify the computer's Energy Star compliance.■To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options.You can also enable Sleep Mode by pressing FN + F3 - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.
User’s Manual 1-10Getting StartedWhen you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when you shut down the computer. Sleep Mode limitationsSleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:■Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.■Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.Hibernation ModeThe Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard disk drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the computer.Benefits of Hibernation ModeThe Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:■Saves data to the hard disk drive when the computer automatically shuts down because of a low battery condition.■You can return to your previous working environment immediately when you turn on the computer.■Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Hibernate feature.■Allows the use of the panel power off feature.■When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the Power indicator will blink orange.■If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode - Sleep Mode will consume more power while the computer is off.■Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data manually.■Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.■Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.
User’s Manual 1-11Getting StartedStarting Hibernation ModeTo enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.1. Click Start.2. Click the arrow button ( ) in the power management buttons ( ) and select Hibernate from the menu.Automatic Hibernation ModeThe computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these settings, you can follow the steps as described below:1. Click Start and click the Control Panel.2. Click System and Maintenance and click Power Options.3. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does.4. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the power button and When I close the lid.5. Click the Save changes button.Data save in Hibernation ModeWhen you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a moment to save the current data in memory to the hard disk drive. During this time, the Hard Disk Drive indicator will glow.After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved to the hard disk drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.Restarting the computerCertain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:■You change certain computer settings.■An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard commands.If you need to restart the computer, there are three ways this can be achieved:■Click Start then click the arrow button ( ) in the power management buttons ( ) and select Restart from the menu.■Press CTRL,ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu window, then select Restart from the Shut down options.You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing FN + F4 - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge.
User’s Manual 1-12Getting Started■Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds before turning the power on again by pressing the power button.System Recovery OptionsAbout 1.5GB hidden partition is allocated on the hard disk drive for the System Recovery Options.This partition stores files which can be used to repair the system in the event of a problem.System Recovery OptionsThe System Recovery Options feature is installed on the hard disk when shipped from the factory. The System Recovery Options menu includes tools to repair startup problems, run diagnostics or restore the system.See the Windows Help and Support content for more information about Startup Repair.The System Recovery Options can also be run manually to repair problems.The procedure is as follows. Follow the instructions shown on the on-screen menu.1. Turn off the computer.2. While holding the F8 key, turn on the computer.3. The Advanced Boot Options menu will be displayed. Use the arrow keys to select Repair Your Computer and press ENTER.4. Follow the on-screen instructions.The Windows Vista® CompletePC Backup feature can be used on Windows Vista® Business Edition and Ultimate Edition.The System Recovery Options feature will be unusable if this partition is deleted.
User’s Manual 1-13Getting StartedSystem RecoveryThis section describes the creation of Recovery Discs and their use.Creating Optical Recovery DiscsThis section describes how to create Recovery Discs.A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the hard disk drive, and can be copied to either CD or DVD media by using the following steps:1. Select either blank CD or DVD media.2. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media onto which the recovery image can be copied including CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows Vista®operating system from the hard disk drive as normal.4. Insert the first blank media into the optical disc drive tray.5. Double click the Recovery Disc Creator icon on the Windows Vista®desktop, or select the application from Start Menu.6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title you wish to copy, and then click the Create button.■Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Discs.■Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery Disc Creator.■Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load on the CPU.■Operate the computer at full power.■Do not use power-saving features.■Do not write to the disc when the virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files automatically in the background.■Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance hard disk drive access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.■Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting the disc.■Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars. ■Do not use on unstable tables or other any other unstable surfaces.Please note that some of the above media may not be compatible with the optical disc drive installed into your computer. You should therefore verify the optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen before proceeding.
User’s Manual 1-14Getting StartedRestoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk driveA portion of the total hard disk drive space is configured as a hidden recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore pre-installed software in the event of a problem.If you subsequently set up your hard disk drive again, do not change, delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual, otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available.In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the partitions on your hard disk drive, you may find that it becomes impossible to setup your computer.1. Turn off your computer.2. While holding down 0(zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your computer.3. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen instructions.If your optical disc drive can only write to CDs, select 'CD' as the 'Disc Set' within the Recovery Disc Creator application.Otherwise, if your optical disc drive can write both CDs and DVDs, select the type of media you want to create.When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN + ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed software without System Recovery Options.When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be reformatted and all data will be lost.
User’s Manual 1-15Getting StartedRestoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery DiscsIf the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to either use the Recovery Discs you have created or the hard disk drive recovery process to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it. To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:1. Load the Recovery Discs into the optical disc drive and turn off the computer's power.2. While holding down F12 key on the keyboard, turn on your computer - when the TOSHIBA logo screen appears, release the F12 key.3. Use the left and right cursors key to select the CD-ROM icon from the menu. Please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup for further information.4. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen instructions.When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN + ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed software without System Recovery Options.When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be reformatted and all data will be lost.When removing pre-installed drivers / utilities or when installing, you can setup the respective drivers / utilities from the following folder.C:\TOSAPINS\***
User’s Manual 2-1Chapter 2The Grand TourThis chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the computer.Front with the display closedThe following figure shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the closed position.Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display panel closedLegal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*1For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *1 above.System indicatorsWireless communication switchHeadphone jacki.LINK (IEEE1394) portMicrophone jack Volume control dialSystem indicators These LED indicators allow you to monitor the status of various computer functions and are described in more detail within the System indicators section.Wireless communication switchSlide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functions. Slide it to the right to turn on the functions.Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth, Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions.
User’s Manual 2-2The Grand Tour■Turn Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functionalities off when near a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality.■Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality if the computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury.■Do not use the Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation.i.LINK (IEEE1394) port This port allows you to connect an external device, such as a digital video camera for high-speed data transfer.Microphone jack A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables connection of a three-conductor mini jack for monaural microphone input.Headphone jack A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables connection of stereo headphones.Volume control dial Use this dial to adjust the volume of the internal stereo speakers and optional external stereo headphones (if connected).Move the Volume control dial to the right to increase the volume and to the left to decrease the volume.
User’s Manual 2-3The Grand TourLeft sideThe following figure shows the computer’s left side.Figure 2-2 The left side of the computerCooling ventsUniversal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) portsPC Card slot (or Smart Card slot)PC Card eject buttonSecurity lock slotThe computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card slot.Cooling vents The cooling vents help keep the processor from overheating.Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Security lock slot A security cable can be attached to this slot and then connected to a desk or other large object in order to deter theft of the computer.Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) ports Two Universal Serial Bus ports, which comply to the USB 2.0 standard, are provided on the left hand side of the computer. The ports with the icon ( ) has USB Sleep and Charge function.Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.PC Card eject button This button is used in order to remove a PC Card from within the computer.PC Card slot This slot can accommodate a single Type II, 16-bit or 32-bit (CardBus) PC Card device.Some models are equipped with a PC Card slot.
User’s Manual 2-4The Grand TourRight sideThe following figure shows the computer’s right side.Figure 2-3 The right side of the computerKeep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the PC Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Smart Card slot This slot can accommodate a single Smart Card device. Some models are equipped with a Smart Card slot.Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the Smart Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Ultra Slim BayTablet PC Pen slotTablet PC PenBridge media slot Modem jackTablet PC Pen slot The Tablet PC Pen slot provides storage for the Tablet PC Pen.Tablet PC Pen The Tablet PC Pen is stored within the right side of the computer and enables direct data entry through the display screen. Some models are equipped with a Tablet PC Pen. Refer to the Using the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve Pensection in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Bridge media slot This slot lets you insert an SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/microSD Card, Memory Stick (PRO/PRO Duo), xD picture card and MultiMediaCard. Refer to the Optional devicessection in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the Bridge media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
User’s Manual 2-5The Grand TourBackThe following figure shows the computer’s back.Figure 2-4 The back of the computerUltra Slim Bay A DVD Super Multi drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor can be installed in the Ultra Slim Bay.Some models are equipped with a DVD Super Multi drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.Modem jack The modem jack allows you use to attach a modular cable in order to connect the internal modem directly to a telephone line.Some models are equipped with a built-in modem.■Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a computer system failure.■Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.■Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).■Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).■Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices. ■Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer. An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or hardware damage.DC IN 15V jackExternal monitor portUniversal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) portLAN jackLAN active indicator (orange) Link indicator (green)Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) port One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the back of the computer.
User’s Manual 2-6The Grand TourKeep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.External monitor port This port allows you to connect an external monitor to the computer.DC IN 15V jack The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to power the computer and charge its internal batteries. Please note that you should only use the model of AC adaptor supplied with the computer at the time of purchase - using the wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the computer.LAN jack This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for details.■Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It could cause damage or malfunction.■Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause damage or malfunction.Link indicator (green) This indicator glows green when the computer is connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning properly.LAN active indicator (orange) This indicator glows orange when data is being exchanged between the computer and the LAN.
User’s Manual 2-7The Grand TourUndersideThe following figure shows the underside of the computer. You should ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to avoid causing any damage.Figure 2-5 The underside of the computerMemory module slotBattery release latch Battery lockNotch Docking portBattery packHDD pack cover screwsHard disk driveUltra Slim BayUltra Slim Bay lock screw (lock position)Ultra Slim Bay latchNotchReserve PenUltra Slim Bay lock screw (unlock position)Notches Notches on the computer engage hooks on the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to ensure a secure connection.Docking port This port enables connection of an optional TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator or a Slice Expansion Battery described in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.■Only the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator can be used with this computer. Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.■Keep foreign objects out of the docking port. A pin or similar object can damage the computer's circuitry. A plastic shutter protects the connector.
User’s Manual 2-8The Grand TourMemory module slot The slot B memory module is located here. The memory module slot allows for the installation, replacement and removal of additional memory module.Refer to the Additional memory module section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.HDD pack cover screws The HDD pack cover screws are the screws that hold the hard disk drive cover in place.Hard disk drive This contains a Hard disk drive pack, which can be removed and reinstalled. For more information on how to remove or reinstall, please refer to the HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options. Battery release latch Slide and hold this latch into its 'Unlock' position in order to release the battery pack ready for removal. For more detailed information on removing the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.Battery lock Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack for removal.Battery pack The battery pack provides power to the computer when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more detailed information on the use and operation of the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Powerand Power-Up Modes.Ultra Slim Bay Refer to the Right side section in this chapter for details.Ultra Slim Bay latch Slide the latch to release or secure the Ultra Slim Bay latch.Be sure to lock the Ultra Slim Bay latch before you transport or carry the computer.Ultra Slim Bay lock screw (lock position) Lock position is used to lock the Ultra Slim Bay Latch.The Ultra Slim Bay Latch is locked by securing the Ultra Slim Bay Lock screw into the lock position.
User’s Manual 2-9The Grand TourFront with the display openThis section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to open the display, lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable viewing angle for you.Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the display panel openUltra Slim Bay lock screw (unlock position)Unlock position is used for changing the Ultra Slim Bay. To unlock the Ultra Slim Bay latch, please move the Ultra Slim Bay Lock screw to unlock position.For more information on how to remove or insert, please refer to the Changing Ultra Slim Bay modules in Chapter 4.Reserve Pen Reserve Pen is contained in the Reserve Pen case of Underside. Reserve Pen enables data entry directly through display screen. Some models are equipped with a Reserve Pen. Refer to the Using the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve Pen section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Display screenTouch Padcontrol buttonsFingerprint SensorDisplay hingeTouch PadKeyboardPower buttonTOSHIBA Assist buttonMicrophone Web CameraWeb Camera LEDESC/Rotation buttonCross Function buttonTOSHIBA Presentation buttonPower buttonLock SwitchStereo speaker (Left)Stereo speaker (Right)Windows Security tablet buttonMemory module slot(Not shown)LCD Sensor switch (Not shown)
User’s Manual 2-10The Grand TourWeb Camera Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live Messenger.Camera Assistant Software will help you to add various video effects to your video or photograph.Enables the transmission of video and use of video chat via the internet using specialized applications.The effective pixel count for this web camera is 1.3 million.Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.Please refer to the Web Camera section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Web Camera LEDThe Web Camera LED glows when the Web Camera is operating.Display screen Please be aware that, when the computer is operating on the AC adaptor, the image displayed on the internal screen will be somewhat brighter than when it operates on battery power. This difference in brightness levels is intended to save power when operating on batteries. For more information on the computer's display, please refer to the Display Controller and Video mode section in Appendix B.Power button Press this button to turn the computer's power on and off.Power Button Lock Switch This switch locks the Power button in order to prevent them from being accidentally pressed. Slide the switch to the left to lock the Power button.Cross Function button This button function will automatically open the Windows Mobility Center window.ESC/Rotation button This button functions the same as the ESC key when tapped, or changes the orientation of the screen when pressed for more than a second.Windows Security tablet button This button functions the same as the Ctrl + Alt + Del keys to show Menu window.
User’s Manual 2-11The Grand TourTOSHIBA Assist button Press this button to launch the program automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the computer and launch the program. TOSHIBA Presentation button The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same functionality as the Connect display button in the Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an external display is connected will open the Windows Vista® TMM (Transient Multimon Manager) screen.Display hinge The display hinge allows the display panel to be position at a variety of easy-to-view angles.Rotate the computer on this fulcrum point when switching between Tablet and Laptop modes.Fingerprint SensorThis sensor enables you to enroll and recognize a fingerprint.Some models are equipped with a Fingerprint Sensor.For detailed information on Fingerprint Sensor, refer to Chapter 4, Using the Fingerprint Sensor.Stereo speakers The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition, generated by the system.Keyboard The internal keyboard provides the embedded numeric overlay keys, dedicated cursor control overlay keys, and Keys. The keyboard is compatible with the IBM® enhanced keyboard. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.Touch Pad The Touch Pad mouse control device located in the center of the palm rest is used to control the movement of the on-screen pointer. For more information, please refer to the Using the Touch Pad section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Touch Pad control buttons The control buttons located below the Touch Pad allow you to select menu items or manipulate text and graphics as designated by the on-screen pointer.
User’s Manual 2-12The Grand TourMicrophone A built-in microphone allows you to import and record sounds for your application - please refer to the Sound System section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for more information.LCD Sensor switch This switch senses when the display panel is either closed or opened and activates the Panel Power Off/On feature as appropriate. For example, when you close the display panel the computer enters Hibernation Mode and shuts itself down and then, when you next open the display, the computer will automatically start up and return you to the application you were previously working on. You can specify within the Power Options. To access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options.Do not put any magnetic objects close to this switch as they may cause the computer to automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if the Panel Power Off feature is disabled.Memory module slot The slot A memory module is located here. The memory module slot allows for the installation and replacement of additional memory module.Refer to the Additional memory module section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.
User’s Manual 2-13The Grand TourIndicatorsThis section explains indicator functions.System indicatorsThe LED system indicators for specific computer operations glow when those operations are in progress.Figure 2-7 System indicatorsDC IN The DC IN indicator normally glows green when power is being correctly supplied from the AC power adaptor. However, If the output voltage from the adaptor is abnormal, or if the computer's power supply malfunctions, this indicator will flash orange.Power The Power indicator normally glows green when the computer is turned on. However, if you turn the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator will flash orange - approximately one second on, two seconds off - both while the system is shutting down and while it remains turned off.Battery The Battery indicator shows the condition of the battery's charge - green indicates the battery is fully charged, orange indicates the battery is charging, and flashing orange indicates a low battery condition. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on this feature.2nd battery The 2nd battery indicator shows the condition of the Slice Expansion Battery's charge - green indicates the Slice Expansion Battery is fully charged, orange indicates the Slice Expansion Battery is charging, and flashing orange indicates a low battery condition.Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on this feature.Hard Disk Drive The Hard Disk Drive indicator glows green whenever the computer is accessing the built-in hard disk drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD.
User’s Manual 2-14The Grand TourKeyboard indicatorsThe following figures show the positions of the CAPS LOCK indicator and the keypad overlay indicators which show the following conditions:■When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce capitals when any letter is typed.■When the Arrow Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you to use cursor functions.■When the Numeric Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you to enter numbers.Figure 2-8 Keyboard indicatorsBridge media slot The Bridge media slot indicator glows green when the computer is accessing the Bridge media slot.Wireless communication The Wireless communication indicator blinks orange when the Bluetooth, Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions are turned on.Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth, Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions.Wireless WAN The Wireless WAN indicator glows or blinks blue when the Wireless WAN function is on.The indicator will glow or blink in order to indicate the connection status of the Wireless WAN function.A Wireless WAN card must be installed to use this function. Some models are equipped with a Wireless WAN card.CAPS LOCK indicatorArrow Mode indicator Numeric Mode indicator
User’s Manual 2-15The Grand TourOptical disc drivesThe computer is configured with a DVD Super Multi drive. Some models are equipped with an optical disc drive. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical disc drives section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Region codes for DVD drives and mediaDVD Super Multi drives and their associated media are manufactured according to the specifications of six marketing regions. When you purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive, otherwise it will not play properly.CAPS LOCK This indicator glows green when letter keys are locked into their uppercase format.Arrow Mode When the Arrow Mode indicator lights green, you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad overlay as cursor keys. Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard for more information.Numeric Mode When the Numeric Mode indicator lights green, you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad overlay for number entry. Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard for more information.Code Region1Canada, United States2Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East3Southeast Asia, East Asia4Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central America, South America, Caribbean5Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea, Mongolia6China
User’s Manual 2-16The Grand TourWritable discsThis section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the specifications of your drive to see the types of discs it can write. Use TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.CDs■CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be erased or changed.■CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once. DVDs■DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double Layer) discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be erased or changed.■DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than once.FormatsThe drive supports the following formats. DVD Super Multi driveThe drive supports the formats CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM (single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing Method 2, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM.Some types and formats of DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs may be unreadable.
User’s Manual 2-17The Grand TourDVD Super Multi driveThe full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.AC adaptorThe AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use this computer in almost all country/region. The adaptor converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source and to the computer. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.Figure 2-9 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer edge.DVD read 8 speed (maximum)DVD-R write 8 speed (maximum)DVD-R DL (UJ-852) write 4 speed (maximum)DVD-R DL (UJ-862) write 6 speed (maximum)DVD-RW write 6 speed (maximum)DVD+R write 8 speed (maximum)DVD+R DL (UJ-852) write 4 speed (maximum)DVD+R DL (UJ-862) write 6 speed (maximum)DVD+RW write 8 speed (maximum)DVD-RAM write 5 speed (maximum)CD read 24 speed (maximum)CD-R write 24 speed (maximum)CD-RW write 16 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)
User’s Manual 2-18The Grand TourFigure 2-10 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)■Depending on the model in question, either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/power lead will be bundled with the computer.■Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.■The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the product is bought and should not be used outside of this region. In order to use the adaptor/computer in other regions, you should please buy a power cord that conforms to the safety rules and regulations in that particular region.Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor.
User’s Manual 3-1Chapter 3Hardware, Utilities and OptionsHardwareThis section describes the hardware of your computer.The actual specifications may vary depending on the model you purchased.ProcessorCPU The computer is equipped with one of the following Intel® processors.■Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which incorporates a 2MB level2 cache memory. It also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®Technology.■Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which incorporates a 4MB level2 cache memory. It also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®Technology.Some models in this series carry Intel® Centrino® Duo processor technology, which is based on three separate technologies of Intel® CoreTM2 Duo processor, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile Intel® 965 Express Chipset Family.Legal Footnote (CPU)*2For more information on the CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or Click the *2 above.
User’s Manual 3-2Hardware, Utilities and OptionsMemoryPowerModule slot 512, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory module can be installed in the computer's memory module slot for a maximum of 4,096MB system memory.Video RAM The amount of Video RAM available is dependent on the computer's system memory.Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display Settings.The amount of Video RAM can be verified by clicking the Advanced Settings... button in the Display Settings window.Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*3For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *3 above.Battery pack The computer is powered by one rechargeable lithium-ion battery pack.Slice Expansion Battery This battery pack increases your computer's operating time when main battery pack is also installed.Some models are equipped with a Slice Expansion Battery.Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*4For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *4 above.
User’s Manual 3-3Hardware, Utilities and OptionsDisksOptical disc driveRTC battery The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time Clock (RTC) and calendar.AC adaptor The AC adaptor provides power to the system and recharges the batteries when they are low. It comes with a detachable power cord which will either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.As the AC adaptor is universal, it can receive a range of AC voltages from 100 to 240 volts, however you should note that the output current varies among different models. Using the wrong adaptor can damage your computer. Refer to the AC adaptor section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.Hard disk drive This computer is equipped with one of the following hard disk drive types. The capacity of each hard disk drive model is different. ■80GB■120GB■160GBPlease note that part of the hard disk drive's overall capacity is reserved as administration space.Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*5For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *5 above.Drive The following optical disc drive is pre-installed in this computer. Some models are equipped with an optical disc drive.■DVD Super Multi drive2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.
User’s Manual 3-4Hardware, Utilities and OptionsDisplayThe computer's internal display panel supports high-resolution video graphics and can be set to a wide range of viewing angles for maximum comfort and readability.SoundDisplay panel 12.1" TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with a resolution of 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical pixels WXGA.The function of the display screen varies from model to model.■Digitizer screen model:Operations on the display screen can be done by using the Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer.■Digitizer and touch screen model:Operations on the display screen can be done by a finger or using the Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer.■Display screen model:Operations on the display screen can not be done by using Tablet PC Pen or a finger. In order to prevent damages to the display screen please refrain from touching it.Legal Footnote (LCD)*6For more information regarding the LCD, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *6 above.Graphics controller The graphics controller maximizes display performance. Refer to Display Controller and Video mode section in Appendix B for more information.Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*7For more information regarding the Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *7 above.Sound system The integrated sound system provides support for the computer's internal speakers and microphone, as allowing an external microphone and headphones to be connected via the appropriate jacks.
User’s Manual 3-5Hardware, Utilities and OptionsMultimediaCommunicationsWeb Camera Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live Messenger.Camera Assistant Software will help you to add various video effects to your video or photograph.Please refer to the Web Camera section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Modem Some models are equipped with the integrated modem. The integrated modem provides capability for data and fax communications that support the V.90 (V.92) standards and includes a modem jack for connection to the telephone line. Please note that both the V.90 and V.92 standards are only supported in the USA, Canada, United Kingdom, France, Germany and Australia - only the V.90 standard is supported in other regions. You should also be aware that the speed of data and fax transfer will depend on the analog telephone line conditions.The integrated model is only installed as a standard device in some markets. Please refer to the V.90 section in Appendix E for more information.LAN The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).It is pre-installed as a standard device in some markets.Bluetooth Some computers in this series offer Bluetooth wireless communication functionality which eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as computers, printers and mobile phones. When implemented, Bluetooth provides a fast, reliable and secure means to achieve wireless communication in a small space.
User’s Manual 3-6Hardware, Utilities and OptionsUltra Slim BaySpecial featuresThe following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.Access each function using the following procedures.*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options.Wireless LAN Some computers in this series are equipped with a Wireless LAN card that is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing radio technology that complies with the IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B, G or n Draft 2.0).Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*8For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *8 above.Wireless WAN Some computers in this series are equipped with a Wireless WAN card. This card supports HSDPA and provides faster communications than previous Wireless WAN cards.Ultra Slim Bay Modules Ultra Slim Bay is a single-drive bay that accommodates an optical disc drive and secondary hard disk drive.Ultra Slim Bay Weight Saver To reduce weight, the Ultra Slim Bay module can be removed and a weight saver installed. It is preinstalled in some models.TOSHIBA Assist button Press this button to launch the program automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the computer and launch the program.TOSHIBA Presentation button The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same functionality as the Connect display button in the Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an external display is connected will open the Windows Vista® TMM (Transient Multimon Manager) screen.
User’s Manual 3-7Hardware, Utilities and OptionsHot keys Hot keys are specific key combinations that let you quickly change the system configuration directly from the keyboard without running a system program.Display automatic power off *1This feature automatically cuts off power to the computer's display panel when there is no keyboard input for a specified time, with power being restored the next time a key is pressed. This can be specified in the Power Options.HDD automatic power off *1This feature automatically cuts off power to the hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a specified time, with power being restored when the hard disk drive is next accessed. This can be specified in the Power Options.System automatic Sleep/Hibernation Mode *1This feature automatically shuts down the system into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when there is no input or hardware access for a specified time. This can be specified in the Power Options.Keypad overlay A ten-key numeric keypad is integrated into the keyboard. Please refer to the Keypad overlaysection in Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for information on using this feature.Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and user, are available to prevent unauthorized access to your computer.Instant security A specific hot key function automatically locks the system providing data security.Intelligent power supply *1A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent power supply detects the battery's charge, automatically calculates the remaining battery capacity and protects electronic components from abnormal conditions such as a voltage overload from the AC adaptor. This can be specified in the Power Options.Battery save mode *1 This feature lets you configure the computer in order to save battery power. This can be specified in the Power Options. Panel power on/off *1This feature automatically turns power to the computer off when the display panel is closed, and turns it back on when the display panel is opened. This can be specified in the Power Options.
User’s Manual 3-8Hardware, Utilities and OptionsLow battery automatic Hibernation Mode *1When battery power is exhausted to the point that computer operation cannot be continued, the system automatically enters Hibernation Mode and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the Power Options. Heat dispersal *1 To protect against overheating, the processor has an internal temperature sensor so that, if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level, the cooling fan is turned on or the processing speed is lowered. This can be specified in the Power Options.TOSHIBA HDD Protection This feature uses the acceleration sensor built in the computer to detect vibration and shocks, and automatically moves the hard disk drive's read/write head to a safe position in order to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for more details.The TOSHIBA HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be damaged.Optical Drive Auto Lock This function automatically locks the optical disc drive eject button if the computer detects any vibration or other shocks while running on the battery.This function prevents the disc tray from opening even if the eject button is pushed unexpectedly.For information on using this feature, please refer to the Optical Drive Auto Lock section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Hibernation Mode This feature lets you turn off the power to the computer without exiting from your software. The contents of main memory are automatically saved to the hard disk drive so that when you next turn the power on again, you can continue working right where you left off. Refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started, for more details.Sleep Mode If you have to interrupt your work, you can use this feature to allow you to turn off power to the computer without exiting from your software. Data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you next turn on the power, you can continue working right where you left off.
User’s Manual 3-9Hardware, Utilities and OptionsTOSHIBA Value Added PackageThis section describes the TOSHIBA Component features pre-installed on the computer.TOSHIBA Power Saver TOSHIBA Power Saver provides you with the features of more various power supply managements.TOSHIBA Button Support This utility controls the following computer button functions.■TOSHIBA Assist■TOSHIBA PresentationThe starting application from the button can be changed.TOSHIBA Zooming Utility This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the icon size on the Windows Desktop, or the zoom factor associated with specific supported applications.TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool The TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool will display basic system configuration information and allow the functionality of some of the computer's built-in hardware devices to be tested.TOSHIBA Password Utility The TOSHIBA Password utility allows you to set a password in order to restrict access to the computer.TOSHIBA Flash Cards The TOSHIBA Flash Cards provide a quick way to modify selected system functions and to launch applications.■Hot key function■TOSHIBA utility launcher functionHW Setup This utility allows you to customize your hardware settings according to the way you work with the computer and the peripherals you use.TOSHIBA Accessibility The TOSHIBA Accessibility utility provides support to movement impaired users when they need to use the TOSHIBA Hot-key functions. In use, the utility allows you to make the FN key 'sticky', that is you can press it once, release it, and they press one of the 'F' keys in order to access its specific function. When set, the FNkey will remain active until another key is pressed.
User’s Manual 3-10Hardware, Utilities and OptionsTOSHIBA Tablet PC ExtensionThis section describes the pre-installed TOSHIBA Component features that come with the computer. To access these components, click Start -> AllPrograms -> TOSHIBA.Utilities and ApplicationsThis section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the computer and details how to start them. For further information on their operation, please refer to each utility's online manual, help files or README.TXT file.TOSHIBA Rotation Utility This utility controls the screen orientation setting for both Laptop mode and Tablet mode.You can set four types of orientation setting:■Primary landscape■Primary portrait■Secondary landscape■Secondary portraitThe default setting of PC mode is Primary Landscape while that for Tablet mode is Primary Portrait.TOSHIBA Accelerometer UtilitiesWhen TOSHIBA Accelerometer Utilities is enabled, you can invoke the Start menu, switch active windows or launch predefined applications by shaking the computer vertically or horizontally, or by tilting it.DVD Video Player The DVD Video Player is used to play DVD-Video. It has an on-screen interface and functions. Click Start -> All Programs -> InterVideo WinDVD -> InterVideo WinDVD for TOSHIBA.■Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may occur during playback of some DVD Video titles. Make sure to connect the computer's AC adaptor when playing a DVD Video. Power-saving features may interfere with smooth playback.■When using the WinDVD™ software, a horizontal white line may appear during playback of a DVD media in VR-format. If this occurs, set the Windows Color scheme to "Windows® Aero™". Adding additional memory is also recommended.
User’s Manual 3-11Hardware, Utilities and OptionsFingerprint Utility This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints which can then be linked to a username and password in order to remove the need to input these details from the keyboard. Just by swiping an enrolled finger against the fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be enabled:■Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.■Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to them is prevented.■Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.■Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Pre-OS Authentication).■Single-Swipe Sign On featureFingerprint security cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module installed.Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba This software enables communication between the computer and external Bluetooth devices such as printers and mobile phones.Bluetooth functions cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth module installed.TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility The TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility allows you to create a bootable SD memory card to start the system. You can boot TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Boot Utility.SD Memory Card Format Utility and other SD functions are packaged into TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities.TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format This utility allows you to format an SD/SDHC memory card by the SD standard format.
User’s Manual 3-12Hardware, Utilities and OptionsTOSHIBA Assist TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that provides access to specific tools, utilities and applications that make the use and configuration of the computer easier.TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities that improve the ease and control of communication devices and network connections, help in the identification of communication problems and allow the creation of profiles if you need to switch between different locations and communication networks. To access this utility, click Start -> AllPrograms -> TOSHIBA -> Networking -> ConfigFree.TOSHIBA Disc Creator You can create CD's and DVD's in a number of formats including audio CD's that can be played on a standard CD player, and data CD's/DVD's which can store copies of the files and folders on your computer's hard disk drive. This software can be used on models with a DVD Super Multi drive.To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> DiscCreator.TOSHIBA DVD-RAM Utility This utility has the function of Physical Format and Write-Protect to DVD-RAM. This utility is contained the setup module of TOSHIBA Disc Creator. To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> DVD-RAM Utility.CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer This utility allows you to configure the read speed of the optical disc drive. You can either configure Normal Mode, which operates the drive at its maximum speed for quick data access, or Quiet Mode which runs audio CDs at single speed and which can lessen operational noise.It is ineffective with DVDs.
User’s Manual 3-13Hardware, Utilities and OptionsWindows Mobility Center This section describes the Windows Mobility Center. Mobility Center is a utility for accessing several mobile PC settings quickly in one window. A default maximum of eight tiles are provided by the operating system, and the additional three tiles are added to your Mobility Center.■Ext.Screen Orientation :This can be used to switch the orientation of an external display connected to your TabletPC between portrait and landscape modes.■Lock Computer :This can be used to lock your computer without turning it off. This has the same function as the Lock button at the bottom of the right pane in the start menu.■TOSHIBA Assist :This can be used to open TOSHIBA Assist if it is already installed in your computer.TOSHIBA Tablet Access Code Logon UtilityIf a Windows password has been set, you can logon to the operating system by entering a handwriting signature into the dialog box using the Tablet PC Pen when prompted.
User’s Manual 3-14Hardware, Utilities and OptionsOptional devicesOptional devices can expand the computer's capabilities and its versatility. This section describes the connection or installation of the following devices:Cards/memory■PC Card■Smart Card■Bridge media slot■Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card, miniSD Card, microSD Card) ■Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo)■xD picture card■MultiMediaCard■Additional memory modulePeripheral devices■HDD Kit (Serial-ATA)■Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor■External monitor■USB■USB FDD Kit■USB Sleep and Charge function■USB WakeUp function■i.LINK (IEEE1394)■TOSHIBA Express Port ReplicatorOther■Security lockTo connect optional devices (such as USB device or External monitor) to the computer, be sure to check the shape and orientation of the connector before connecting.
User’s Manual 3-15Hardware, Utilities and OptionsPC CardSome models are equipped with a PC Card slot. The computer is equipped with a single PC Card slot that can accommodate a Type II format card. Any PC Card that meets industry standards, either manufactured by TOSHIBA or another vendor, can be installed as the slot supports 16-bit PC Cards and 32-bit CardBus cards. For reference, CardBus supports the newer standard of 32-bit PC Cards and provides superior performance for the greater demands of applications such as multimedia data transmission.Inserting a PC CardThe Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert PC Cards while the computer is turned on.To insert a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on the side of the computer.2. Press the PC Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made.Figure 3-1 Inserting the PC Card3. After inserting the PC Card, you should refer to its documentation and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is correct.PC Cards can sometimes become hot during computer operation. Before you remove a PC Card always wait for it to cool. You could get burned removing a hot PC Card.■The computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card slot.■When inserted in the PC Card slot, some PC Cards may block the optical disc drive tray and prevent it from opening. If this occurs please remove the PC Card each time you wish to open or close the optical disc drive tray.Do not insert a PC Card while the computer is in Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode as you may find that some cards do not work properly.PC CardPC Card slot
User’s Manual 3-16Hardware, Utilities and OptionsRemoving a PC CardTo remove a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.2. Point to PC Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.3. Press the PC card eject button to extend it.4. Press the extended PC Card eject button in order to eject the PC Card partially out of the computer.5. Grasp the PC Card and remove it.Figure 3-2 Removing the PC CardSmart CardSome models are equipped with a Smart Card slot. A Smart Card is a credit card sized plastic card. An extremely thin integrated circuit (IC chip) is embedded into the card on which information can be recorded. These cards can be used for a wide variety of applications including telephone related and electronic monetary payments.This section contains information on the proper use of the Smart Card slot, and it is strongly recommended that you read it before operating the computer. If the PC card is not inserted all the way, the eject button may not cause it to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. Be sure to push the PC card firmly into the computer and slide the eject button again.PC CardPC Card eject button■Your computer supports ISO7816-3 asynchronous cards (support protocols are T=0 and T=1) with a working voltage of 5V.■The computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card slot.
User’s Manual 3-17Hardware, Utilities and OptionsInserting a Smart CardThe Smart Card slot is located on the left side of the computer. The Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert a Smart Card while the computer is turned on.To install a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Insert the Smart Card into the Smart Card slot with the metal connectors facing up.2. Press the Smart Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made. The computer will identify the Smart Card and display an icon in the Windows Taskbar.Figure 3-3 Inserting a Smart Card3. After inserting the Smart Card, you should refer to its documentation and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is correct.■When inserting a Smart Card into the Smart Card slot, make sure to confirm that the card is oriented correctly before inserting.■Insert the Smart Card until it reaches the end of the Smart Card slot. There will be about 2cm of the Smart Card sticking out of the Smart Card slot. Do not attempt to insert it further.■Always remove the Smart Card from the Smart Card slot before moving the computer.■Remove the Smart Card after use.Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the computer and/or damage to the Smart Card.
User’s Manual 3-18Hardware, Utilities and OptionsRemoving a Smart CardTo remove a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.2. Point to Smart Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.3. Grasp the Smart Card and remove it.Figure 3-4 Removing a Smart CardBridge media slotThe computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants. ■Before removing the Smart Card, confirm that the Smart Card is not working with any program or system.■Be careful not to bend the Smart Card while removing it from the computer.■Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.■Memory Stick Duo is not compatible with the Bridge media slot. Do not insert Memory Stick Duo into the slot or you may not be able to remove it. Data may be lost or damaged if you use any memory media other than those supported.
User’s Manual 3-19Hardware, Utilities and OptionsFigure 3-5 Examples of memory mediaMemory mediaThis section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle your memory media.Points to note about the SD/SDHC memory cardSD/SDHC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback protected material on another computer or other device, and you may not reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.Below is a simple explanation for distinguishing SD memory cards from SDHC memory cards.■SD and SDHC memory cards appear the same externally.■The logo on SD and SDHC memory cards is different, so pay careful attention to the logo when purchasing.■This Bridge media slot supports the following memory media.■Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card, miniSD Card, microSD Card)■Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo)■xD picture card■MultiMediaCard (MMC)■Please note that an adaptor is required to use miniSD/microSD Card.■Please note that an adaptor is required to use Memory Stick PRO Duo.■Please note that not all memory media have been tested and verified to work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all memory media will operate properly.■The slot does not support Magic Gate functions.Secure Digital (SD) Card Memory Stick xD picture card MultiMediaCard (MMC)■The SD memory card logo is ( ).■The SDHC memory card logo is ( ).
User’s Manual 3-20Hardware, Utilities and Options■The maximum capacity of SD memory cards is 2GB. The maximum capacity of SDHC memory cards is 8GB.Memory media formatNew media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media cards.Formatting an SD/SDHC memory cardSD/SDHC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific standards. If you format the SD/SDHC memory card again, be sure to format it with the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, not with the format command provided within Windows. In order to run the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Card Format.Media careObserve the following precautions when handling the card.Card care■Do not twist or bend cards.■Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid.■Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty.■After using card, return it to its case.■The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try to force the card into the slot.■Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you hear it click into place.Card Type CapacitiesSD 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GBSDHC 4GB, 8GBThe TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility does not format the protected area of the SD/SDHC memory card - should you need to format all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you will need to obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system.
User’s Manual 3-21Hardware, Utilities and OptionsMemory card care■Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record data.■Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to backup important data.■Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power could affect writing accuracy.■Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress.About the write-protectThe following memory media have a function for protect.■SD Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card)■Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo)■MultiMediaCard (MMC)Inserting a memory mediaThe following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To insert a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) are face down.2. Insert the memory media into the Bridge media slot on the side of the computer.3. Press the memory media gently to ensure a firm connection is made.Figure 3-6 Inserting a memory mediaFor more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the cards.Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record data.Memory mediaBridge media slot
User’s Manual 3-22Hardware, Utilities and OptionsRemoving a memory mediaThe following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To remove a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.2. Point to memory media and click the left Touch Pad control button.3. Press the memory media to partially extend it out of the computer.4. Grasp the media and remove it.Figure 3-7 Removing memory media■Make sure memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If you insert the media in wrong direction, you may not be able to remove it.■When inserting memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You could expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy data.■Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.Memory mediaBridge media slot■Make sure the Bridge Media slot indicator is out before you remove the memory media or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the memory media, you may lose data or damage the media.■Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the memory media could be lost.■Do not remove only the miniSD/microSD Card while leaving the adaptor in the Bridge Media slot.
User’s Manual 3-23Hardware, Utilities and OptionsAdditional memory moduleThis computer is equipped with two memory slots; Slot A is beneath the keyboard and Slot B is in the underside of the computer.You can install additional memory into the computer in order to increase the amount of system memory that is available. This section describes how to install and remove optional memory modules.Point to note about memory module errorIf you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, the Power indicator will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the following ways;■If there is an error in only Slot A or no memory module is inserted in Slot A: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then green.■If there is an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange, then green twice.■If there are errors in both Slot A and Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then green twice.In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the incompatible module(s).■You should place a mat beneath the computer in order to prevent the computer's lid from becoming scratched or damaged when you are installing/replacing the memory module. In this instance you should avoid mats that are made of materials that hold or generate static electricity.■When installing or removing a memory module, you must ensure that you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer.■Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.■Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following conditions.a. The computer is turned on.b. The computer was shut down in either Sleep or Hibernation Mode.c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.d. Wake-up on Wireless LAN is enabled.e. The wireless communication switch is turned on.■Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.■Additional memory module is a precision electronic component that may be fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can carry static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before touching or installing any additional memory modules. To discharge your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with bare hands.
User’s Manual 3-24Hardware, Utilities and OptionsInstalling a memory module (Slot A)To install a memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to the computer.3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).4. Turn your computer over.5. Open the display panel so that the screen faces directly upward.6. Slip your finger under a notch at the end of the keyboard brace and lift up to release latches and remove the keyboard brace.7. Remove two screws securing the keyboard.Figure 3-8 Removing the keyboard brace and two screwsUse a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws - the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.Keyboard braceScrews
User’s Manual 3-25Hardware, Utilities and Options8. Lift up the back of the keyboard, rotate it toward you and lay in face down on the palm rest.Figure 3-9 Rotate the keyboard9. Remove the two screws and take off the memory module cover.Figure 3-10 Removing the memory module cover■Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.■When you move the keyboard forward, do not touch the keys. Doing so could cause misalignment. Hold the keyboard by the sides and lay it gently on the palm rest.■The keyboard is connected to the computer by a keyboard ribbon cable. Be careful not to apply tension to this cable when you lift up the keyboard. Do not try to disconnect this cable.KeyboardMemory module coverScrews
User’s Manual 3-26Hardware, Utilities and Options10. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory module slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before holding it down until the latches on either side snap into place.Figure 3-11 Installing the memory moduleSlot A■Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.■Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.■The memory module cover will be hot after using the computer for long periods of time. Exercise caution when removing.■Slot A is reserved for the first memory module. Use slot B for expansion memory modules. If only one module is installed, use slot A.■When inserting or removing memory modules, make sure to use the correct slot (A or B).■Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the locking tabs on the connector and insert the memory module into the connector firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prise the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger. Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.
User’s Manual 3-27Hardware, Utilities and Options11. Screw in the two screws and replace the memory module cover.Figure 3-12 Seating the memory module cover12. Insert the tabs on the front of the keyboard into the corresponding notches on the computer and place the keyboard down.13. Replace the keyboard and secure it using the two screws.Figure 3-13 Replace the keyboard14. Set the keyboard brace into its groove and hold down to secure the latches.15. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.16. Turn your computer over.17. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized - to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance ->System icon.Memory module coverScrewsWhen seating the keyboard, be sure to connect the circuit board if the keyboard ribbon cable was pulled out while you were removing the keyboard.Be sure to use all two screws removed in step 7. Make sure no screw was dropped into the computer. Make sure no foreign matter can be found inside the computer.KeyboardScrewsTabs
User’s Manual 3-28Hardware, Utilities and OptionsRemoving a memory module (Slot A)To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to the computer.3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).4. Follow steps 4 through 9 in Installing a memory module (Slot A) to appear the memory module.5. Push the latches to the outside to release the memory module. A spring will force one end of the memory module up.6. Grasp the sides of the memory module and pull it out.Figure 3-14 Removing the memory module7. Rotate the keyboard back into place and secure the keyboard brace as described in the previous section.8. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.9. Turn your computer over.The slot A is reserved for main memory. Use the slot B for expanded memory. If only one card is installed, use the slot A.■If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or you will get burnt if you touch any of them.■Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.Latches
User’s Manual 3-29Hardware, Utilities and OptionsInstalling a memory module (Slot B)To install a memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to the computer.3. Close the display panel.4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to the Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).5. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from being lost.6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.Figure 3-15 Removing the memory module coverAlways make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.ScrewMemory module cover
User’s Manual 3-30Hardware, Utilities and Options7. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory module slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before holding it down until the latches on either side snap into place.Figure 3-16 Seating the memory moduleSlot B■Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.■Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the locking tabs on the connector and insert the memory module into the connector firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prise the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger. Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.
User’s Manual 3-31Hardware, Utilities and Options8. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.Figure 3-17 Seating the memory module cover9. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.10. Turn your computer over.11. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized - to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance ->System icon.Removing a memory module (Slot B)To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to the computer.3. Close the display panel.4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).5. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from being lost.6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.7. Push the latches away from the module in order to release it - a spring will force one end of the module up at an angle.Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.ScrewMemory module coverAlways make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.
User’s Manual 3-32Hardware, Utilities and Options8. Grasp the memory module by its edges and remove it from the computer.Figure 3-18 Removing the memory module9. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.10. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.11. Turn your computer over.■If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or you will get burnt if you touch any of them.■Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems.LatchesTake care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.
User’s Manual 3-33Hardware, Utilities and OptionsHDD Kit (Serial-ATA)An extra hard disk drive expands the flexibility of your system and allows you to carry your data separately without having to carry the computer.The HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) can either replace the hard disk drive installed inside the computer or be connected to the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.Some models are equipped with a Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.Removing the hard disk drive packTo remove the hard disk drive pack, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to the computer.3. Close the display panel.4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).5. Loosen two screws securing the hard disk drive cover in place.6. Lift the cover up and out, and remove it from the computer.Figure 3-19 Removing the hard disk drive cover7. Pull the hard disk drive pack up to a vertical position by holding the plastic tab.Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws - the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.ScrewsHard disk drive cover
User’s Manual 3-34Hardware, Utilities and Options8. With the hard disk drive in a vertical position, lift it straight up and away from the connector.Figure 3-20 Removing the hard disk drive packInstalling the hard disk drive packTo install the hard disk drive pack, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Move the connector until it is vertical.2. Hold the hard disk drive vertically with its label on the left.3. Connect the hard disk drive to the connector.Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Plastic tabHard disk drive packConnectorEnsure that the hard disk drive is connected to the connector in a vertical position. If the hard disk drive is slanted and connected to the connector, it might damage the connector.
User’s Manual 3-35Hardware, Utilities and Options4. With the connector connected, lower the hard disk drive down to the storage position.Figure 3-21 Installing the hard disk drive pack5. Seat the cover and press down until the latches click into place.6. Secure the cover with two screws.7. Turn your computer over.Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.Hard disk drive packConnector
User’s Manual 3-36Hardware, Utilities and OptionsUltra Slim Bay HDD AdaptorYou can increase your computer’s data storage capacity by installing an additional 80GB hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay.To install a hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor follow the steps below.1. Slide the lock to the unlock position and open the lid.Figure 3-22 Opening the lid2. Insert the hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor and push forward to ensure a firm connection.Figure 3-23 Inserting the hard disk driveLidLockTuck the Plastic tab underneath the hard disk drive.Hard disk drive
User’s Manual 3-37Hardware, Utilities and Options3. Close the lid and slide the lock to the lock position.Figure 3-24 Closing the lidFor details on inserting the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor in the computer’s Ultra Slim Bay slot, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.External monitorAn external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port on the computer.Connecting the monitor cableTo connect a monitor, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn the computer's power off.2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the screws on the left and right hand side of the connector as required.Figure 3-25 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port3. Turn the external monitor's power on.LidExternal monitor portMonitor cable
User’s Manual 3-38Hardware, Utilities and Options4. Turn the computer's power on.When you turn on the power, the computer will automatically recognize the monitor and determine whether it is a color or monochrome device. In the event that you find that there are issues getting an image displayed on the correct monitor, you should consider using the FN + F5 hot key to change the display settings (if you then disconnect the external monitor before you turn the computer's power off, be sure to press FN + F5 hot key again to switch to the internal display).Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details on using hot keys to change the display setting.USBThe computer is equipped with the Universal Serial Bus ports that can accommodate some kinds of devices.These ports comply with the USB 2.0 standard.USB FDD KitThe USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.Figure 3-26 The USB floppy diskette driveDo not disconnect the external monitor while in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. Turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.Eject buttonFloppy diskette slotDisk-In-Use IndicatorUSB connector
User’s Manual 3-39Hardware, Utilities and OptionsConnecting the USB floppy diskette driveTo connect the drive, plug the floppy diskette drive’s USB connector into a computer’s USB port. Figure 3-27 Connecting the USB floppy diskette driveDisconnecting the USB floppy diskette driveWhen you have finished using the USB floppy diskette drive, you can follow the procedures below in order to disconnect it:1. Wait for the Disk-In-Use Indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy diskette activity has stopped. 2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.3. Click the USB floppy diskette drive device that you want to remove.4. Carefully pull the floppy diskette drive's USB connector out from within the computer's USB port.Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket. Do not try to force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.USB connectorUSB portIf you connect the USB floppy diskette drive after the computer has already been turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the computer. Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this period has elapsed.If you disconnect the USB floppy diskette drive or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the floppy diskette or the drive.
User’s Manual 3-40Hardware, Utilities and OptionsUSB Sleep and Charge functionYour computer can supply USB bus power (DC5V) to the USB port even when the power of the computer is turned OFF. "Power OFF" includes Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.This function can only be used for ports that support the USB Sleep and Charge function (hereinafter called "compatible ports").Compatible ports are USB ports that have the ( ) symbol icon.You can use the "USB Sleep and Charge function" to charge certain USB-compatible external devices such as mobile phones or portable digital music players.However, the "USB Sleep and Charge function" may not work with certain external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In those cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device.■The "USB Sleep and Charge function" only works for compatible ports.This function is disabled in the default setting. To enable it, you must change [Disabled] to [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup.Refer to the USB Sleep and Charge function section in Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup.■When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in BIOS Setup, USB bus power (DC5V) will be supplied to compatible ports even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.USB bus power (DC5V) is similarly supplied to the external devices which are connected to the compatible ports. However, some external devices cannot be charged solely by supplying USB bus power (DC5V).As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the device manufacturer or check the specifications of the external devices thoroughly before use.■Using the USB sleep and charge function to charge external devices will take longer than charging the devices with their own chargers.■If external devices are connected to compatible ports when the AC adaptor is not connected to the computer, the battery of the computer will be depleted even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.As such, we recommend that you connect the AC adaptor to the computer when using the USB sleep and charge function.■External devices connected to the USB bus power (DC5V) function that interfaces with the power ON/OFF of the computer may always be in an operational state.■When there is a current overflow of the external devices connected to the compatible ports, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for safety reasons.Metal paper clips or hair pins/clips will generate heat if they come into contact with USB ports. Do not allow USB ports to come into contact with metal products, for example when carrying the computer in your bag.
User’s Manual 3-41Hardware, Utilities and OptionsUSB WakeUp functionThis function restores the computer from Sleep Mode depending on the external devices connected to the USB ports.The "USB WakeUp function" operates under Windows Vista® OS and it works for all USB ports.i.LINK (IEEE1394)i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of compatible devices such as:■Digital video cameras■Hard disk drives■MO drives■Writable optical disc drivesPrecautions■Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer. There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data.■Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.■If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub before you turn on the computer’s power.■You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a video camera except for your personal enjoyment.■"USB WakeUp function" will supply USB bus power (DC5V) to all USB ports ,including compatible ports, even when the computer is in Sleep Mode.USB bus power (DC5V) will not be supplied if the computer is in Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.■When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in BIOS Setup, the "USB WakeUp function" does not work for compatible ports. The WakeUp setting (function to allow the WakeUp) check box will be displayed on the Device Manager. You can change the settings but the USB WakeUp function will not work. For example, if a mouse or USB keyboard is connected to a compatible port, moving the mouse/keyboard will not "wakeup" the computer.In that case, attach the mouse or keyboard to an USB port that does not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon ( ).i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry any electric current. External devices will need their own power supply to operate.
User’s Manual 3-42Hardware, Utilities and Options■If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames might be dropped. ■Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:■Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.■Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device that is connected to the computer.Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cableTo connect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer.Figure 3-28 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.Note the following when you use i.LINK:■You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.■Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.■Some devices might not support sleep or automatic off functions.■Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to save power. Data might be destroyed.Disconnecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cableTo disconnect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.i.LINK (IEEE1394)connectori.LINK (IEEE1394)portRefer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.
User’s Manual 3-43Hardware, Utilities and OptionsTOSHIBA Express Port ReplicatorIn addition to the ports available on the computer, the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator. The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator connects directly to the docking interface on the underside of the computer. The AC adaptor connects the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to a power source.The following ports are available on the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator.■RJ45 LAN jack■External monitor port■DC IN 15V jack■Security lock slot■Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)■DVI portThe computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN. Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator regarding set-up procedures.■You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to a TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator.■When a TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator is connected to the computer, you can not use the following computer's ports: LAN jack, DC IN 15V jack and External monitor port.■When connecting an AC Adaptor to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator, use only the AC Adaptor included with TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator. Do not use the computer’s AC Adaptor.■As the port operation of all DVI (Digital Visual Interface) monitors has not been confirmed, some DVI monitors may not function properly.■Set the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator's Slide Adjuster to SLIDE position #4 when connecting this computer to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator. Refer to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator User's Manual for more details on connection methods.
User’s Manual 3-44Hardware, Utilities and OptionsSecurity lockA security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer has a security lock slot on its left side into which you can attach one end of the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object. The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to product. Please refer to the instructions for the product you are using for more information. Connecting the security lockIn order to connect a security cable to the computer, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn the computer so its left hand side faces you.2. Align the security cable with the 'lock hole' and secure it in place.Figure 3-29 Security lockSecurity lock slot
User’s Manual 3-45Hardware, Utilities and OptionsOptional accessoriesYou are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference, the following list details some of the items that are available from your reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:DDR2-400/533 Memory Module A 512MB or 1,024MB memory module (DDR2-533) can easily be installed in the computer.DDR2-667 Memory Module A 512MB, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory module (DDR2-667) can easily be installed in the computer.Universal AC Adaptor If you frequently use your computer at more than one site, it may be convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in order to remove the need to always carry the adaptor with you.Battery Pack An additional battery pack can be purchased for use as either a spare or replacement. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modesfor further information.Slice Expansion Battery This battery pack increases your computer's operating time when a main battery pack is also installed. It is connectable to the Docking port of the computer.Slice Expansion Battery adaptor The Slice Expansion Battery adaptor is used to connect with the Battery Charger in order to charge a Slice Expansion Battery.Battery Charger The optional battery charger allows you to charge extra battery packs outside of having to use the computer.USB FDD Kit The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette through connection to one of the computer's USB ports. In use, please be aware that, while you cannot format 720KB floppy diskettes under Windows Vista®, you are able to read and write to diskettes that have already been formatted.HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) You can increase your computer's data storage capacity with additional hard disk drive. It is available in the following size:■80GB
User’s Manual 3-46Hardware, Utilities and OptionsUltra Slim Bay optionsThe following module can be installed in the Ultra Slim Bay. All other module is option.TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator provides the ports available on the computer in addition to a digital visual interface (DVI) port, External monitor port, Universal Serial Bus port (USB2.0) x 4, LAN jack. Tablet PC Pen Tablet PC Pens can be purchased from your TOSHIBA dealer for use as spare items (spare pen tips and a tip draw-out tool are included).Reserve Pen Reserve Pen can be purchased from your TOSHIBA dealer. Use the Reserve Pen in place of the Tablet PC Pen if the Tablet PC Pen is lost or broken. Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor An adaptor lets you install an optional hard disk drive described in Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.Ultra Slim Bay DVD Super Multi (Double Layer) Drive KitRefer to the Hardware section for details.
User’s Manual 4-1Chapter 4Operating BasicsThis chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, highlights the precautions that should be taken when using it.Pointing DevicesThe pointing devices of this computer vary from model to model.■Digitizer screen model: The Touch Pad and the Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer can be used as a pointing device.■Digitizer and touch screen model: The Touch Pad and Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer or a finger can be used as pointing devices.■Display screen model: The Touch Pad can be used as a pointing device.■Digitizer and touch screen model: The Touch pointer is provided as a supplementary tool for operations which are difficult to carry out only using your finger.■Display screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be done either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain from touching the display screen to avoid damaging it.
User’s Manual 4-2Operating BasicsUsing the Touch PadTo use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttonsThe two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you are using.Touch PadTouch Pad control buttonsYou can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the left button on a standard mouse.Click: Tap onceDouble-click: Tap twiceDrag and drop: Tap to select the item(s) you want to move, leave your finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and then move the item(s) to their new destination.
User’s Manual 4-3Operating BasicsUsing the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve PenYou can use the Tablet PC Pen to execute actions and enter data. Hold the Tablet PC Pen in a natural position and tap, press or trace on the screen lightly.Some computers in the series are equipped with a Tablet PC Pen and a Reserve Pen.Figure 4-2 The Tablet PC Pen (the left) and Reserve Pen (the right)Eraser button You can use this button as an eraser when using a graphics software application. Text based software application enable you to select and delete characters with a one-touch action.Pen button Provides the same function as clicking the right Touch Pad control button.Pen point Provides the same function as clicking the left Touch Pad control button.Eraser buttonPen buttonPen pointPen buttonPen point
User’s Manual 4-4Operating BasicsObserve the following precautions on the handling of the Tablet PC Pen.■In order to avoid damages to the display screen, please refrain from doing anything other than the specified operation methods. Failure to do so could cause a malfunction or characteristic deterioration.■Do not tap or press the Tablet PC Pen forcefully against the display as this could damage the Tablet PC Pen and the screen itself.■Avoid using or keeping the Tablet PC Pen in areas where the temperature can change rapidly or in places, such as a car, where the Tablet PC Pen is exposed to direct sunlight. Store the Tablet PC Pen without any pressure being applied to the buttons. Failure to do so could cause a malfunction or characteristic deterioration.■The Tablet PC Pen is composed of precision parts. Do not drop the Tablet PC Pen. Strong impact causes a malfunction or characteristic deterioration.■Do not apply excessive force to the Tablet PC Pen point and the side buttons. Excessive force applied to these parts causes short life or characteristic deterioration (Allowable force to pen point, Eraser button, Pen button: less than 1 kg, for less than 30 seconds).■Avoid water entering the Tablet PC Pen or condensation forming within it as either condition will cause a malfunction.■Do not disassemble the Tablet PC Pen. It causes maladjustment or short life.■Do not stain the Tablet PC Pen with cosmetics or chemicals as this will cause a deterioration in appearance. Use a glass wiping cloth or dry cloth to clean the Tablet PC Pen. Do not use volatile liquids such as alcohol, thinner or petroleum benzine to clean the Tablet PC Pen.■Do not apply excessive force to the Tablet PC Pen point as a bent or deformed pen point will cause a malfunction.■Keep the small parts of the Tablet PC Pen, such as the pen point or the knob of the side buttons, away from infants and small children to prevent the accidental ingestion by them.■Do not use a ball point pen instead of the Tablet PC Pen included with the product.■Do not use a broken pen tip.■The pen tip cannot be replaced if it is worn (Reserve Pen only).■You can change the Tablet PC Pen setting and the Touch pointer setting, using the Pen and Input Device.■TOSHIBA is not liable for any problems arising on the products due to the use of the Tablet PC Pen in an environment where the above conditions are not satisfied or because of its use by unspecified number of users.
User’s Manual 4-5Operating BasicsRemoving the Tablet PC PenTo remove the Tablet PC Pen, follow the steps as described below:1. Slide the Tablet PC Pen from the Tablet PC Pen slot, so that it protrudes slightly.2. Pull the Tablet PC Pen to remove it from the Tablet PC Pen slot.Figure 4-3 Removing the Tablet PC PenInserting the Tablet PC PenThe Tablet PC Pen is included in the small case coming with the product. Remove the Tablet PC Pen from small case and install it to the computer as follows:1. Insert the Tablet PC Pen into the Tablet PC Pen slot until it clicks.Figure 4-4 Inserting the Tablet PC PenPen actionsYou can use the Tablet PC Pen to enter data, start programs, move objects and execute other actions.Single tapLightly tap the tip of the Tablet PC Pen on an object and lift it immediately to execute an action. A single tap is similar to clicking the left touch pad control button.Tablet PC PenTablet PC Pen slotThe Tablet PC Pen and the Reserve Pen are different in shape. Do not insert the Reserve Pen into the Tablet PC Pen slot.Tablet PC Pen slotTable t PC Pen
User’s Manual 4-6Operating BasicsDouble tapLightly tap the tip of the Tablet PC Pen twice on an object and lift it immediately to execute an action. A double-tap is similar to double-clicking the left touch pad control button.Press and holdTouch the tip of the Tablet PC Pen to the display screen and hold it there to display a pop-up menu or other action. Press and hold is similar to clicking the right touch pad control button.DragTouch the Tablet PC Pen to the screen. Without lifting the Tablet PC Pen, drag it across the screen to select text or objects.Drag and dropTouch the Tablet PC Pen to the screen to select an object. Without lifting the Tablet PC Pen, drag it across the screen. Lift the Tablet PC Pen to drop the object to a new location.Replacing the pen tipTo replace the pen tip, follow the steps as described below:1. Pinch the tip with a draw-out tool and pull it out.2. Insert a new pen tip into the Tablet PC Pen carefully, and press it securely.Figure 4-5 Replacing the pen tipDraw-out toolPen tipDo not continue to use a broken pen tip as this may result in scratching of the display panel. When the pen tip breaks replace it with one of the refills delivered with the Tablet PC Pen. When these refills have run out, you can purchase a new pen set from a TOSHIBA authorized dealer.■A short and worn pen point is difficult to pull out. Replace the pen point with a refill before it becomes too short to remove.■It is recommended that you keep another pen set as a spare. You can buy replacement pen sets from your TOSHIBA authorized dealer.
User’s Manual 4-7Operating BasicsRemoving the Reserve Pen caseTo remove the Reserve Pen case, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Save your work.2. Turn the computer’s power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.5. Slide and then lift out the Reserve Pen case.Figure 4-6 Removing the Reserve Pen caseInserting the Reserve Pen caseTo insert the Reserve Pen case, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Insert the Reserve Pen case into the Reserve Pen case slot on the computer and slide it until it locks. Figure 4-7 Inserting the Reserve Pen caseAlways make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.Push lightly the point shown by the arrow using an object with a thin tip.Reserve Pen caseReserve Pen case slotReserve Pen caseReserve Pen case slot
User’s Manual 4-8Operating BasicsStoring and Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen caseFollow the procedures below to remove the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen case. Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen case1. Lift the Reserve Pen up from the Reserve Pen case by its end. Figure 4-8 Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen caseStoring the Reserve Pen in the Reserve Pen case1. Insert the tip of the Reserve Pen into the Reserve Pen case holder and press down.Figure 4-9 Storing the Reserve Pen in the Reserve Pen caseReserve Pen caseReserve PenReserve Pen caseReserve PenReserve Pen case holder
User’s Manual 4-9Operating BasicsUsing the Tablet modeThis section explains Tablet mode functions and use.Operating the computer in Tablet modeWhen operating the computer in Tablet mode, follow the instructions below.Figure 4-10 Operating the computer in Tablet mode (using a Tablet PC Pen)■Hold the computer firmly on your forearm. Do not block the vent.■Remove the AC adaptor from the computer when using it in Tablet mode held in your forearm.■Do not use the computer while walking or driving a car.■Change to Laptop mode and turn off the computer before carrying it. Do not carry the computer with power on or in Sleep Mode. Do not carry the computer while the Hard Disk Drive indicator is glowing.■Do not expose the computer to rapid temperature changes (such as would be the case if you brought the computer from a cold environment into a warm room). When rapid temperature changes are unavoidable, leave the computer for around two hours before turning it on to prevent the formation of condensation.■Remove all external peripheral devices and their connection cables from the computer before carrying. ■Do not drop the computer or apply excessive impact to it. Do not leave the computer in a car or similar environment where it is exposed to direct sunlight.■Do not put the computer in a bag when it is in Tablet mode.
User’s Manual 4-10Operating Basics■The function of the display screen varies from model to model.■Digitizer screen model: Please use the Tablet PC Pen to operate, which comes with the computer.Please carefully observe the following items in order to avoid damaging the display screen. Incorrect use could cause the screen to be scratched.■Do not press on the screen with anything other than the included touch pen (especially with anything pointed) ■Prevent long fingernails and rings or other metal from touching the screen ■Do not apply excessive pressure to the screen■Digitizer and touch screen model: Please operate either using the Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer or your finger.Please carefully observe the following items in order to avoid damaging the display screen. Incorrect use could cause the screen to be scratched.■Do not press on the screen with anything other than the included touch pen (especially with anything pointed) ■Prevent long fingernails and rings or other metal from touching the screen ■Do not apply excessive pressure to the screen■If you operate simultaneously by finger and Tablet PC Pen, then the operation of Tablet PC Pen gets executed. Operations done by the finger are not available.■Only touch one location at a time when operating using your finger. If you touch multiple locations simultaneously, the input will not be correctly interpreted.■Display screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be done either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain from touching the display screen to avoid damaging it.
User’s Manual 4-11Operating Basics■The display panel works as a touch sensitive digitizer screen. However, the outer edges of the screen may be less sensitive. Please keep the Tablet PC Pen or your finger inside the display area when you use it near the edges of the display panel. The position of the pen may not be recognized if you move the Tablet PC Pen or your finger too fast towards the outer edge. Please be sure to slide the Tablet PC Pen or your finger slowly in areas near the edges of the screen.Use the Tablet PC Pen or your finger in the areas enclosed by the dotted line as shown in the following figure.Figure 4-11 Use area of a Tablet PC PenDisplay screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be done either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain from touching the display screen to avoid damaging it.■When performing operations on the display screen using the Table PC Pen or a finger, the on-screen cursor position may deviate from the actual pen (or finger) position in the following situations:■If the screen resolution is lower than 1280 x 800 (For example 800 x 600)■When the Aspect Ratio Options in the Intel® GMA Driver for Mobile (Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for mobile) Display Settings are set to Maintain Aspect Ratio or Center DesktopAdjust one of the following settings to correct cursor position deviation.■Set the resolution to 1280 x 800■Set the Aspect Ratio Options to Full Screen (No Border)■Do not block the vent of the computer when holding it. If you continue to expose your skin to the hot air expelled from the vent for a long time, your skin might suffer low temperature injury.
User’s Manual 4-12Operating BasicsChanging to the Tablet modeTo change from Laptop mode to the Tablet mode, follow the instructions below.1. Open the display panel to the upright position. Figure 4-12 Changing to the Tablet mode (1)When rotating the display panel, be sure to keep the display panel at a 90-degree angle to the keyboard.■Place the computer on a stable, flat surface such as a desktop and rotate the display panel slowly, holding the panel at its lower part.■To change from Laptop mode to Tablet mode you must rotate the display panel 180 degrees clockwise.Tablet mode icon Turn the display panel to the direction indicated by the Tablet mode icon.To change from Tablet mode to Laptop mode you must rotate the display panel 180 degrees counter-clockwise.Laptop mode icon Turn the display panel to the direction indicated by the Laptop mode icon.
User’s Manual 4-13Operating Basics2. Rotate the display panel clockwise slowly.Figure 4-13 Changing to the Tablet mode (2)3. Close the display panel slowly with display surface facing upwards.Figure 4-14 Changing to the Tablet mode (3)■When rotating display panel of your computer, be sure to slowly turn it in the proper direction, and not apply excessive force or speed.■Do not attempt to rotate the display panel past the maximum rotation point. Forcing the display panel past the maximum rotation point will damage the display panel.■Rotating the display panel counter-clockwise will break the hinge and cause the computer to cease to function correctly.
User’s Manual 4-14Operating BasicsChanging to the Laptop modeTo change the operating mode to the Laptop mode, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Raise the display to the upright position carefully.2. Rotate the display counter-clockwise slowly.3. Close the display.Changing the screen orientationThe orientation of the computer screen can be changed to one of the following four display modes:Figure 4-15 Four display modesSecondary landscapePrimary landscapeSecondary portraitPrimary portrait
User’s Manual 4-15Operating BasicsMethod 1: Changing the screen orientation using TOSHIBA Accelerometer Utilities and TOSHIBA Rotation UtilityWhen the TOSHIBA Accelerometer Utilities and TOSHIBA Rotation Utility are running, changes in the orientation of the top and bottom of the screen is automatically recognized by pressing ESC/Rotation button for more than a second.Method 2: Changing the screen orientation using Taskbar1. Click Start and open Control Panel.2. Select Mobile PC.3. Open Tablet PC Settings.4. Click Change button in Display tab.■Execute the following applications on Primary landscape:■3D game software■3D screen saver■Playback of a motion picture as would be the case using DVD-Video playback on the computer connected to an external DVD-ROM Drive.■The screen cannot automatically rotate in the following cases.You should first quit the running application and then rotate the screen:■Running of an application that changes the screen resolution dynamically, such as a game that is running in full-screen mode.■DOS prompt in full-screen mode.■Running of 3D screen saver.■Do not play 3D game software or replay DVD-Video in a display mode other than Primary landscape. An abnormality will appear on the Windows screen display when you replay a DVD-Video in a mode other than Primary landscape because DVD playback software can boot only in the Primary landscape mode.■An abnormality will appear on the Windows screen display when you change from Tablet mode to Laptop mode while a 3D screen saver is running. In this case, press any key while in Laptop mode to deactivate the 3D screen saver.
User’s Manual 4-16Operating Basics5. Select a screen orientation from the Orientation pull down menu and change the screen.Using Accelerometer UtilitiesIt is safer if you hold the computer with both hands horizontally as shown in the below example.Figure 4-16 Shake the computerYou can set the orientation of the desktop screen just after rotating the display from Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Tablet PC ->Rotation Utility.When you shake the computer:■Do not shake the computer too strongly as this may cause the computer to be dropped or hit those people or items around you.■Avoid using the computer in crowded places (e.g. in commuter trains or in busy streets).This may cause injury to children or adults, or damage to the computer.When the TOSHIBA HDD protection function is turned on and the Tilt function (function to start applications, etc. by waving the computer vertically or horizontally) is used, the TOSHIBA HDD protection message may be displayed on the screen. Turn off the TOSHIBA HDD protection function in order to stop such messages from displaying.The computer is shaken perpendicularly.The computer is shaken horizontally.
User’s Manual 4-17Operating BasicsUsing the Fingerprint SensorThis product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:■Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.■Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to them prevented.■Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.■Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Pre-OS Authentication).■Single-Swipe Sign On featureHow to Swipe your FingerUsing the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch the sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you when in portrait mode, and sideways when in either landscape mode or Laptop mode.While lightly touching the sensor, swipe the finger towards you when in portrait mode, and sideways when in either landscape mode or Laptop mode until the sensor surface becomes visible.Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module installed.
User’s Manual 4-18Operating BasicsThe following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger over the fingerprint sensor.Figure 4-17 Swipe the fingerSample. 2) When swiping the thumbSample. 1) When swiping the index fingerSensorSensor■Avoid swiping with your finger stiff or pressed too hard onto the sensor, and take care to ensure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the sensor before swiping. Either of these conditions may cause fingerprint reading to fail.■Check the center of the fingerprint whorl before swiping and then ensure this is swiped along the center line of the sensor.■There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too quickly or too slowly - follow any on-screen instructions to adjust the speed used during the swipe process.
User’s Manual 4-19Operating BasicsPoints to note about the Fingerprint SensorPlease be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower fingerprint recognition success rate.■Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp objects.■Do not press the sensor strongly.■Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects - keep the sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.■Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign particles of dust and dirt may scratch it.■Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.■Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which may have a build-up of static electricity on it.Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.■Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.■Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures, especially when the weather is dry.■Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth - do not use detergent or any other chemicals to clean the sensor.■Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the fingerprint recognition success rate■Soaked or swollen finger, for example as may occur after taking a bath.■Injured finger■Wet finger■Soiled or oily finger■Extremely dry skin condition on fingerObserve the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.■Enroll two or more fingers.■Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using already enrolled fingers.■Check the condition of your finger - any conditions which have changed since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet, soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, may lower the recognition success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate may be lowered.■As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique you should ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are used for identification.
User’s Manual 4-20Operating Basics■Check the position and speed at which you swipe your finger across the sensor - please refer to the preceding drawing.■The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints.■The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.Setup ProcedurePlease use the following procedure when first using fingerprint authentication.Fingerprint RegistrationYou should initially enroll the required authentication data using the Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard.1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access Manager -> Fingerprint Application.2. The Verify screen will be displayed, enter the Windows logon password and click the Next button.3. On the User's Fingers screen click the box above the finger you wish to register.If any of the previously enrolled fingerprints is selected again, the latest information will be enrolled and any previous information over-written.4. The Fingerprint Enrollment screen will be displayed and the tutorial will begin. First click "Replay video" and confirm the proper movement for the finger you wish to register. Then confirm the message displayed on this screen and ensure that there is a check mark in the RunInteractive Tutorial box. Once this has been done, click Next.5. At the Scanning Practice screen, you are able to practice swiping (three times) your finger to ensure you use the correct method. Click "Try again" to if you wish to practice again. You have finished practicing, click Next button.■In use, the fingerprint authentication system will use the same username and password as defined within the Windows operating system. If no Windows password has been configured, you must do this before starting the fingerprint registration process.■This sensor has the memory space for at least twenty-one fingerprint patterns. You might be able to register more fingerprint patterns depending on the sensor memory usage.You are also able to start the Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard by using the following methods.■Click the Fingerprint Application icon in the Taskbar.
User’s Manual 4-21Operating Basics6. Register your fingerprint on the Fingerprint Image Capture screen.Let the computer read the finger to be registered 3 times. An image of your fingerprint will be shown on the screen each time the fingerprint is successfully read.Once the fingerprint is successfully read for the third time, the message Successfully combined will be displayed beneath the fingerprint images. Click the Next button.7. When the Store To Sensor screen is displayed, check Store fingerprint to Sensor. Click Finish to complete fingerprint registration.How to Delete the Fingerprint DataSaved fingerprint data is stored in special non-volatile memory inside the fingerprint sensor. Therefore, if you give the computer to someone else, or dispose of it in any way, the following process is recommended to delete your fingerprint information:1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access Manager -> Fingerprint Application.2. The Verify screen will be displayed, so either swipe your registered finger or enter the Windows logon password and click the Next button.3. The User's Fingers screen is displayed.■To delete all registered fingerprints■To delete individual fingerprintsIt is strongly recommended that you register 2 or more fingerprints. Repeat the procedure from step 3 to register another fingerprint.1. Click Delete All Fingerprints.2. Follow the on-screen instructions to deleted the registered fingerprints.1. Click the fingerprint mark above the registered finger.2. Click Delete All Fingerprints.3. "Are you sure you want to delete this fingerprint?" will be displayed on the screen, click Yes button.4. When Delete All Fingerprints is selected, the user selection screen will be displayed, so select which user's fingerprint data to delete.■Selecting "Delete current user's fingerprints" will delete the fingerprint data for the currently logged in user.■Selecting "Delete all users' fingerprints" will delete the fingerprint data for all users, however this item can only be selected if the currently logged in user has administrator privileges.5. A message will be displayed asking for confirmation to delete the fingerprint data, click the Yes button.
User’s Manual 4-22Operating BasicsIn use, please be aware of the following limitations of the fingerprint sensor:■A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.■The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints.■The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.■Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology will be error-free.■Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility softwareThe Encrypting File System (EFS) is a Windows Vista® feature.If a file is encrypted using EFS, it cannot be encrypted further using the fingerprint authentication function.Windows Logon via Fingerprint AuthenticationIf required, you are also able to use fingerprint authentication in place of the usual Windows logon process using your username and password.This method is especially useful where there are many users using the same computer as it removes the need for actual user selection when the system is started.Fingerprint Authentication Procedure1. Start up the computer.2. At the Windows Welcome screen, choose any of the enrolled fingers and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor - if the authentication process is successful, the user will automatically be logged in to Windows.You are able to backup saved fingerprint data and information within the by using the Import or Export User Data facility under the fingerprint management software. However, please be aware that any encrypted files cannot be backup within File protection using this function - in these instances it is recommended that you backup these files to external media using standard file copy processes.If the fingerprint authentication process fails you will need to log into Windows using the appropriate username and password. In addition, you should use this manual login process if fingerprint authentication fails for three consecutive tries - a warning message will be displayed when authentication is not normal or is not successful within a fixed duration.
User’s Manual 4-23Operating BasicsFingerprint Pre-OS AuthenticationGeneralThe fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard based password authentication system that is used when the computer is turned on.If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password authentication while booting up the computer, instead you prefer using the keyboard entry method, simply press the BACK SPACE key or the ESC/Rotation button when the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication screen is displayed.Using this process will switch the password input screen across to the keyboard based entry screen.How to Enable Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication SettingsIt is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Fingerprint Application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication System. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access Manager -> Fingerprint Application with Admin.2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button.This setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has administrator privileges.3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.4. Click the Setting menu at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.5. Administrator Setting screen is displayed, check the "Enable Pre-OS Fingerprint Authentication" check box and then click OK.6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.■You must ensure that you use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to register a User Password before using the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication and its extended function to allow fingerprints to be used to access the computer when it is turned on.■If the fingerprint authentication process fails five times, a preset time limit is exceeded, or you press the BACK SPACE key, [Password =] will be displayed on the screen and you will have to enter either the User Password or Supervisor Password manually in order to start the computer.■When swiping your finger, please ensure that you do it slowly and at a constant speed. If you find that this does not improve the authentication rate, you should try to adjust the speed at which the finger is swiped.■If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information such as a User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) password).
User’s Manual 4-24Operating BasicsFingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On FeatureGeneralThis is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both the User/BIOS Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) and logging onto Windows using only one fingerprint authentication when booting up.It is necessary to register the User/BIOS Password and Windows Logon Password before using the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication and this Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On Feature. Please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to register your User/BIOS Password. If Windows Logon is not the default for your system, see Manual to register your Windows Logon Password.Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) and the Windows Logon Password.How to Enable Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On FeatureIt is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Fingerprint application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On feature. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access Manager -> Fingerprint Application with Admin.2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button.This setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has administrator privileges.3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.4. Click the Setting menu at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.5. Administrator Setting screen is displayed, check the "Enable Single-Sign On Fingerprint Authentication" check box and then click OK.6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.Fingerprint utility limitationsTOSHIBA does not guarantee that the fingerprint utility technology will be completely secure or error-free, or that it will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times. TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software.■The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints.■The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.
User’s Manual 4-25Operating BasicsWeb CameraWeb Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live Messenger.Camera Assistant Software will help you to add various video effects to your video or photograph.Enables the transmission of video and use of video chat via the internet using specialized applications.The effective pixel count for this web camera is 1.3 million.Please refer to the Camera Assistant Software Online Help for details.Figure 4-18 Web CameraWeb CameraWeb Camera LEDMicrophone
User’s Manual 4-26Operating BasicsChanging Ultra Slim Bay modulesThis section explains how to change modules in the Ultra Slim Bay. The illustrations show replacement of the optical disc drive with the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.Removing a moduleTo remove the optical disc drive, follow the steps as described below:1. Save your work.2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.4. Close the display panel.5. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).6. Remove the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw from the Lock position.7. Set the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw in the Unlock position.■Do not point the web camera directly at the sun.■Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens. Doing so may reduce image quality. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other soft cloth to clean the lens if it becomes dirty.■Setting the [Size] to more than "800x600" will cause a larger amount of data to be written to the hard disk drive and may interfere with smooth recording.■When recording in dimly lit environments, the following procedure can be used to select "Night Mode" which allows for brighter images with less noise.1. Click the Properties button on the [Web Camera] menu.2. Check Night Mode on the [Options] tab.3. Click the OK button.The number of frames per second is lowered when "video recording" in "Night Mode". This may result in the playback of the recorded video file seeming unsmooth.To avoid injury, do not put your hand into the Ultra Slim Bay slot.Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.Wait for all disk indicators to go out before you turn over the computer and do not lay the computer down gently. Shock can damage the HDD or other components.
User’s Manual 4-27Operating Basics8. Slide the Ultra Slim Bay latch to the unlock position.9. Grasp the optical disc drive and slide it out.Figure 4-19 Removing the optical disc driveInserting a moduleTo insert the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor, follow the steps as described below:1. Insert the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor in the computer as shown below and press until the Ultra Slim Bay latch clicks.2. Remove the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw from the Unlock position.3. If you want to lock the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor, set the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw in the hole for the lock position.Figure 4-20 Inserting the Ultra Slim Bay HDD AdaptorThe optical disc drive and other Ultra Slim Bay modules can become hot with use. Be careful when removing the module.Lock screw(Unlock position)Optical disc driveUltra Slim Bay latchLock positionUltra Slim Bay HDD AdaptorLock screw(Lock position)Unlock position
User’s Manual 4-28Operating BasicsUltra Slim Bay Case (UJ-862 model only)The DVD Super Multi drive (UJ-862) is equipped with an Ultra Slim Bay Case. This section explains how to remove and install the DVD Super Multi drive unit (UJ-862).Removing a unitTo remove the DVD Super Multi drive unit from the Ultra Slim Bay Case, follow the steps as described below:1. Slide the Ultra Slim Bay latch to the unlock position.2. Grasp the DVD Super Multi drive unit and slide it out.Figure 4-21 Removing the DVD Super Multi drive unitInserting a unitTo insert the DVD Super Multi drive unit into the Ultra Slim Bay Case, follow the steps as described below:1. Insert the DVD Super Multi drive unit in the Ultra Slim Bay Case as shown below and press until the Ultra Slim Bay latch clicks.Figure 4-22 Inserting the DVD Super Multi drive unitStore the DVD Super Multi drive unit (UJ-862 model only) in the Ultra Slim Bay Case when removing it from the computer or transporting it.Refer to Ultra Slim Bay Case (UJ-862 model only) section in this chapter.DVD Super Multi drive unit Ultra Slim Bay latchDVD Super Multi drive unit
User’s Manual 4-29Operating BasicsUsing optical disc drivesThe full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROM-based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-ROM, an indicator on the drive glows.If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.Loading discsTo load CD/DVDs, follow the steps as detailed below:1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open the disc tray slightly.2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.Figure 4-23 Pressing the eject button and pulling the disc tray openUse the WinDVD application to view DVD-Video discs.When the power of the optical disc drive is off, pressing the FN +Tab keys will turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Furthermore, it is possible to set it to turn the power of the optical disc drive on and eject the tray at the same time.Disc trayEject button
User’s Manual 4-30Operating Basics3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray. Figure 4-24 Inserting a CD/DVD4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with the spindle base.Laser lensWhen the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD, however, make sure it lies flat.■Do not touch the laser lens or any portion of its surrounding casing as this could cause misalignment.■Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray, to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.
User’s Manual 4-31Operating Basics5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into place. Figure 4-25 Closing the CD/DVD disc trayRemoving discsTo remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps as detailed below:1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull the disc tray out until it is fully opened.2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can grasp it. Gently lift out the CD/DVD.Figure 4-26 Removing a CD/DVDIf the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the CD/DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when you press the eject button.Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media drive. Wait for the optical disc drive indicator to go out before you open the disc tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait for it to stop before you remove it.When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.
User’s Manual 4-32Operating Basics3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into place.Optical Drive Auto LockThis function automatically locks the optical disc drive eject button if the computer detects any vibration or other shocks while running on the battery.This function prevents the disc tray from opening even if the eject button is pushed unexpectedly.When the Optical Drive Auto Lock is on, there will be key mark on the bottom right of the Optical Drive Power icon in the Taskbar.Setting the Optical Drive Auto LockRight click the Optical Drive Power icon in the Taskbar to change the Optical Drive Auto Lock settings.Enabling and Disabling Optical Drive Auto Lock1. Right click on the Optical Drive Power icon on the Taskbar.2. Click Optical Drive Auto Lock -> Enable or Disable.Lock Time Settings for Optical Drive Auto LockThis sets the amount of time required to pass before the optical disc drive eject button unlocks when the Computer detects vibration or other shock.1. Right click on the Optical Drive Power icon on the Taskbar.2. Click Unlock time settings -> 1s or 3s or 5s.To enable this function, turn the Optical Drive Power ON.■When the Optical Drive Auto Lock is engaged, the FN+Tab key combination and Eject Buttons on application screens are disabled.■Optical Drive Auto Lock is not enabled immediately after the computer is started, the Disc tray is closed, or the optical disc drive is switched from OFF to ON using the FN+Tab keys.
User’s Manual 4-33Operating BasicsHow to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not openPressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the eject hole near the eject button.Figure 4-27 Manual release with the eject holeWriting CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drivesYou can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM discs. TOSHIBA Disc Creator is provided as writing software with this computer.Eject holeTurn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and cause injury.■Please refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types of writable CD and DVD discs that can be supported by this computer.■Do not turn off the power to the optical disc drive while the computer is accessing it as this may cause you to lose data.■To write data to CD-R/-RW media, use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator feature that is installed on your computer.■When the power of the optical disc drive is off, the disc tray will not open even if the eject button is pushed. Use the ODD to turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Please refer to Chapter 5, Hot keys.
User’s Manual 4-34Operating BasicsImportant messageBefore you write or rewrite to any of the media supported by the DVD Super Multi Drive, please read and follow all of the setup and operating instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, you may find that the DVD Super Multi drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write or rewrite information successfully - this may cause you to either lose data or incur other damage to the drive or media.DisclaimerTOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:■Damage to any CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.■Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded contents.■Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or software.Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or problems with hardware devices. In view of this, it is good practice to make two or more copies of important data, in case of any undesired change or loss of the recorded contents.Before writing or rewriting■Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the following manufacturers of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, however, it must be noted that disc quality can affect write or rewrite success rates. Please also be aware that in no event does TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any disc.When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a live power socket. It is possible that, if data is written while powered by the battery pack, the write process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these instances data loss may occur.CD-R: TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD. MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co., Ltd.
User’s Manual 4-35Operating BasicsCD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed) MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co., Ltd. CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONDVD-R:DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LtdDVD-R (Dual Layer): MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONDVD+R:MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONRICOH Co., Ltd.DVD+R (Double Layer):MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONDVD-RW:DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version 1.2VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN.LIMITEDMITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONDVD+RW:MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATIONRICOH Co., Ltd.DVD-RAM:DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1 or Version 2.2Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.Hitachi Maxell Ltd.
User’s Manual 4-36Operating Basics■If the disc is poor in quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors may be noted - ensure that you check all discs for dirt or damage before you use them.■The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media will be affected by the quality of the disc itself and the way in which it is used.■There are two types of DVD-R media available, authoring discs and general use discs. Do not attempt to use authoring discs as only general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.■You can use both DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge and DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.■You may find that other computer DVD-ROM drives or other DVD players may not be able to read DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW discs.■Data written to a CD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R (Double Layer) discs cannot be deleted either in whole or in part.■Data deleted/erased from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc cannot be recovered. You must check the content of the disc carefully before you delete it, taking care that, if multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, you do not delete data from the wrong one.■In writing to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, some space is required for file management, so you may not be able to write to the full capacity of the disc.■Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with dummy data if the written data is less than about 1GB. Therefore, in these circumstance, even if you write only a small amount of data, it might take additional time to fill in the dummy data.■When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be sure that you do not write to or delete data from the wrong drive.■Be sure to connect the AC adaptor to the computer before you write or rewrite any information.■DVD Super Multi drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than 16x speed (DVD-R and DVD+R media), 8x speed (DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+RW and DVD+R (Double Layer) media), 6x speed (DVD-RW media), 5x speed (DVD-RAM media).■Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double Layer) discs may be unreadable.■2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.■DISC created in DVD-R (Dual Layer) format4 (Layer Jump Recording) cannot be read.
User’s Manual 4-37Operating Basics■Before you enter either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, take care to ensure that any DVD-RAM writing has been completed. In this instance, writing is finished if you can eject the DVD-RAM media.■Be sure to close all other software programs except for the writing software itself.■Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load on the processor.■Operate the computer at its full power settings - do not use any power-saving features.■Do not write information while virus checking software is running, instead wait for it to finish, then disable the virus protection applications, including any software that checks files automatically in the background.■Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those that are intended to enhance hard disk drive access speeds, as they may cause unstable operation and damage data.■CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media should not be used as data may be lost or damaged.■You should always write from the computer's hard disk drive onto the CD/DVD - do not try to write from shared devices such as a server or any other network device.■Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been confirmed, therefore operation with other software applications cannot be guaranteed.When writing or rewritingPlease observe the following points while you write or rewrite data to CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media:■Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media - do not use the cut-and-paste function as the original data will be lost if there is a write error.■Do not perform any of the following actions:■Change users in the Windows Vista® operating system.■Operate the computer for any other function, including such tasks as using a mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.■Start a communication application such as a modem.■Apply impact or vibration to the computer.■Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as a PC Card, Smart Card, SD/SDHC Card, USB device, external monitor, i.LINK device, or an optical digital device.■Use the audio/video control button to reproduce music or voice.■Open the optical disc drive.■Do not use shut down, log off, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode functions while writing or rewriting.
User’s Manual 4-38Operating Basics■Make sure that the write/rewrite operation is completed before going into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode (writing is completed if you can remove an optical media on the DVD Super Multi drive).■If the media is of poor quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors may occur.■Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. In addition, do not use the computer on an unstable surface such as a stand.■Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away from the computer.TOSHIBA Disc CreatorPlease be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator:■DVD Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■DVD Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's 'Audio CD for Car or Home CD Player' function to record music to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media.■Do not use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator in order to copy DVD Video or DVD-ROM material that has copyright protection.■DVD-RAM discs cannot be backed up using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer) or DVD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW to CD-R or CD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.■TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.■You might not be able to use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc that was made with other software on a different optical media recorder.■If you add data to a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R (Double Layer) disc that you have already recorded to, you might not be able to read the added data under some circumstances. For example, it cannot be read under 16-bit operating systems, such as Windows 98SE and Windows Me, while in Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6 or later, and in Windows 2000, you will need Service Pack 2. In addition to this, some DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM / CD-R/RW drives cannot read this added data regardless of the operating system.
User’s Manual 4-39Operating Basics■TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs - to achieve this you should use Windows Explorer or another similar utility.■When you back up a DVD disc, be sure that the source drive supports recording to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media - if this is not the case then the source disc might not be backed up correctly.■When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc, be sure to use the same type of disc.■You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc.Data VerificationTo verify that data has been written or rewritten correctly to a data CD/DVD you should follow the steps below before you begin the write/rewrite process:1. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:■Click the Recording settings button ( ) for writing on the main toolbar in the Data Disc mode.■Select Settings for Each Mode -> Data Disc in the Settings menu. 2. Mark the Verify written data check box.3. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.4. Click the OK button.How to learn more about TOSHIBA Disc CreatorPlease refer to the Help files for additional TOSHIBA Disc Creator information.
User’s Manual 4-40Operating BasicsMedia careThis section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect the data stored on it.CD/DVDs1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to protect them and keep them clean.2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the CD or DVD that contains the data.4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole - any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from properly reading data.5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction. If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any similar cleaning solution.Floppy diskettes1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored data.4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these conditions could cause data loss.7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy diskette drive or other devices within the computer.The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.
User’s Manual 4-41Operating Basics8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can damage the magnetic surface.11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers, radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.Sound SystemThis section describes some of the audio control functions.Volume MixerThe Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of devices and applications under Windows.■To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu.■To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the Speakers slider.■To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move the slider for the corresponding application.Microphone LevelFollow the steps below to change the microphone recording level.1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Recording Devices from the sub menu.2. Select Microphone, and click Properties.3. On the Levels tab move the Microphone slider to increase or decrease the microphone volume level.If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate, move the Microphone Boost slider to a higher level.PC Beep LevelFollow the steps below to change the PC Beep playback level.1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.3. On the Levels tab move the PC Beep slider to increase or decrease the PC Beep volume level.
User’s Manual 4-42Operating BasicsAudio EnhancementsIn order to apply the sound effects for your current speaker, follow the steps below.1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback Devices from the sub menu.2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.3. On the Enhancements tab select the sound effects you would like, and click Apply.Realtek HD Audio ManagerYou can confirm and change the audio configuration using the RealtekAudio Manager. To launch the Realtek Audio Manager, click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Realtek HD Audio Manager.When you first launch the Realtek Audio Manager, you will see two device tabs. Speakers is the default output device. Microphone is the default input device. To change the default device, click the Set Default Devicebutton under the chosen device tab.InformationClick the information button to view hardware information, software information, and language setting.Power ManagementThe audio controller in your computer can be turned off when the audio function is not used. To adjust the configuration of audio power management, click the battery button .■When audio power management is enabled, the circle button at the upper left of the Power Management is blue and convex.■When audio power management is disabled, the button is black and concave.Speaker ConfigurationClick the playback button to confirm the internal speakers or the headphone sound is coming from the right direction.Default FormatYou can change the sample rate and bit depth of sound.
User’s Manual 4-43Operating BasicsTOSHIBA Mic EffectTOSHIBA Mic Effect provides you with a hands-free environment for holding mutual communication via the Internet Protocol or Local Area Network. If you wish to communicate with someone on your computer, you can use a messenger application. However, with such an application, you would hear your own voice returning to you as echo during the communication if you did not use a headset system or headphone. TOSHIBA Mic Effect will reduce these echoes generated on your computer.To apply the echo cancellation, follow the steps below.1. Click the right button of a mouse on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.2. On the Playback tab, select Speakers, and click Properties.3. On the Advanced tab, select “16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD Quality)” in the pull-down menu of Default Format, and then click OK.4. On the Recording tab, select Microphone, and click Properties.5. On the Advanced tab, select “2 channel, 16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD Quality)” in the pull-down menu of the Default Format pane.6. On the TOSHIBA Mic Effect tab, select the Enable Echo Cancellercheck box, and click Apply.ModemThis section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem to and from a telephone jack.■Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a computer system failure.■Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.■Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).■Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).■Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices. ■Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer. An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or hardware damage.■Modem functions cannot be used in models which are not equipped with a modem.This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.
User’s Manual 4-44Operating BasicsRegion selectionTelecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region in which it will be used.To select a region, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking -> Modem Region Select.2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Taskbar.3. Click the icon with the primary (left) mouse button to display a list of regions that the modem supports, together with a sub-menu which details telephony location information - a check mark will appear next to the currently selected region and telephony location.4. Select either a region from the region menu or a telephony location from the sub-menu.■When you click a region it becomes the modem's default selection for any new dialling locations that are created within the Windows Control Panel (Phone and Modem Options).■When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is automatically selected and becomes the modem's default setting.Properties menuClick the icon with the secondary (right) mouse button in order to display a Properties menu on the screen.SettingWithin the Properties menu you are able to either enable or disable the following settings:AutoRun ModeAllows you to configure whether the Modem Region Select utility starts automatically whenever you start up the operating system.Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.Allows you to configure whether the dialing properties dialog box will be displayed automatically after you have selected a region.The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions. Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.If it is available, do not use the Country/Region Select function included as part of the modem setup utility within the Control Panel - if you change the country/region setting this way you may find that the change does not take effect.
User’s Manual 4-45Operating BasicsLocation list for region selection.Displays a sub-menu appears which details location information.Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current Location region code do not match.Displays a warning if the current settings for both region code and telephony location are different.Modem SelectionIf the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is displayed from which you should select the appropriate communications port for your modem to use.Dialing PropertiesYou should select this item in order to display the dialing properties.Connecting the modular cableTo connect the modem's modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Plug the end of the modular cable into the computer's modem jack.If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other selection.■Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a computer system failure.■Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.■Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).■Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).■Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices. ■Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer. An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or hardware damage.
User’s Manual 4-46Operating Basics2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.Figure 4-28 Connecting the internal modemDisconnecting the modular cableTo disconnect the modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Pinch the lever on the plug in the telephone jack and pull it out from within the connector.2. Pinch the lever on the plug in the computer's modem jack and pull it out from within the computer.Modem jack Telephone jackDo not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is connected.If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or hard disk drive connected to a 16-bit PC Card, you might experience the following problems with the operation of the modem:■The modem speed is slow or communication is periodically interrupted.■Skips or jumps may be noted in sound.
User’s Manual 4-47Operating BasicsWireless communicationsThe computer’s wireless communication function supports both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth devices.Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.Wireless LANThe Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum / Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing radio technology that complies with the IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN standard (Revision A, B, G or n Draft 2.0).■Frequency Channel Selection of 5GHz for IEEE 802.11a or 2.4GHz for 802.11b/g■Roaming over multiple channels■Card power management■Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi), Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or Wireless WAN operation.■Turn Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functionalities off when near a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality.■Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality if the computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury.■It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified network name using the ad hoc network function.If this occurs, the new network(*) will have to be configured for all computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable network connections.* Please be sure to use new network name.Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on Wireless LAN is enabled.■The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.■The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is effective only when it is connected with an Access Point. This function becomes invalid when the connection is broken.
User’s Manual 4-48Operating Basics■Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption based on an 128-bit encryption algorithm■Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)Setting1. Please make sure that the Wireless Communication Switch is turned on.2. Click Start and then click Connect To to display Connect to a network window.3. Click Set up a connection or network.4. Follow the wizard. You will need the name of the wireless network together with security settings. Consult the documentation accompanied with your router or ask your wireless network administrator for the settings.Security■TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality, otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of stored data.■TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.Bluetooth wireless technologyBluetooth™ wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones. You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional Bluetooth devices simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:Worldwide operationThe Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band, which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries in the world.The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as specified under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.
User’s Manual 4-49Operating BasicsRadio linksYou can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of each other.SecurityTwo advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:■Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible to falsify the origin of a message.■Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.Bluetooth™ Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBAPlease note that this software is specifically designed for the following operating systems:■Microsoft® Windows Vista®Information regarding the use of this software with these operating systems is listed below, with further details being contained with the electronic help files supplied with the software.Release Notes related to the Bluetooth™ Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA1. Fax application software:Please be aware that there is some fax application software that you cannot use on this Bluetooth™ Stack.2. Multi-user considerations:On Windows Vista®, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi-user environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other users that are logged into the same computer will not be able to use this type of functionality.Product Support:The latest information regarding operating system support, language support or available upgrades can be found on our web site http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.Wireless communication switchYou can enable or disable Wireless communication (Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN) functions, with the on/off switch. No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off. Slide the switch to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.This Bluetooth™ Stack is based on the Bluetooth™ Version 1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR specification. However, TOSHIBA cannot confirm the compatibility between any computing products and/or other electronic devices that use Bluetooth™, other than TOSHIBA notebook computers.
User’s Manual 4-50Operating BasicsWireless communication IndicatorThe wireless communication indicator shows the status of the computer's wireless communication functions.If you used the Taskbar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer or perform the following procedure to re-enable it: Start -> Control Panel-> System and Maintenance -> System -> Device Manager -> Network adapters and right click the wireless device then choose enable.LANThe computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.LAN cable typesIf you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a CAT3 cable.If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.Indicator status IndicationIndicator off The wireless communication switch is off - no wireless functionality is available.Indicator glows Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is enabled.■The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.■The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device, cable or noise and so on).The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN. Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator regarding set-up procedures.
User’s Manual 4-51Operating BasicsConnecting the LAN cableTo connect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices connected to the computer.2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear the latch click into place.Figure 4-29 Connecting the LAN cable 3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router. Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor before using or configuring a network connection.■Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may hang up.■Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.■Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.LAN jackLAN cableLink indicatorLAN Active indicatorWhen the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Activeindicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.
User’s Manual 4-52Operating BasicsDisconnecting the LAN cableTo disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull out the connector.2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub or router in the same manner. Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor before disconnecting from the hub.Computer HandlingThis section explains computer handling and maintenance.Cleaning the computerTo help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.■Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely - in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any damage.■Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened cloth.■You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with the cloth.Moving the computerWhile the computer is designed for rugged durability you should exercise a few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free operation.■Before moving the computer, it is recommended that you change the setting associated with the Hard Disk Drive Protection feature. Please refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection, in this chapter for further information.■Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer - check that the HDD and other indicators on the front of the computer are off.■Turn off (shut down) the computer.Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you disconnect the computer from the LAN.Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer.
User’s Manual 4-53Operating Basics■Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the computer.■Close the display panel.■Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.■Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in minor heat injury.■Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer failure or loss of data.■Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in product failure.■Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.■When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does not fall or hit anything.■Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ProtectionThis computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on the hard disk drive.Using an acceleration sensor built into the computer, TOSHIBA HDD Protection detects vibration shocks and similar signs of movement of the computer, and automatically moves the Hard Disk Drive head to a safe position to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused by head-to-disk contact. When vibration is detected, a message will be displayed on the screen, and the icon in the Taskbar notification area will change to the protection state. This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30 seconds pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal state.Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.■This function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be damaged.■The secondary hard disk drive is not supported by the TOSHIBA HDD protection function.
User’s Manual 4-54Operating BasicsTaskbar iconTOSHIBA HDD Protection PropertiesYou can change the TOSHIBA HDD Protection settings by using the TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties window. To open the window, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HDD Protection Settings. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar or from the Control Panel.HDD ProtectionYou can choose whether to enable or disable TOSHIBA HDD Protection.Detection LevelThis function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which vibrations, impacts and their similar signs are detected can be set to OFF, 1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better protection of the computer. However, when the computer is used in a mobile environment or in other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3 could result in frequent execution of TOSHIBA HDD Protection, which will slow Hard Disk Drive reading and writing. Set a lower detection level when the speed of Hard Disk Drive reading and writing is a priority.Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage), the detection level automatically switches according to the power connection mode.3D ViewerThis feature displays a 3D object on the screen which moves in according to tilting or vibration of the computer.When the TOSHIBA HDD Protection detects computer vibration the Hard Disk Drive head is parked and the 3D object disk rotation will stop. When the head is un-parked the disk will begin to rotate again.The 3D Viewer can be started from the icon in the task tray.State Icon DescriptionNormal TOSHIBA HDD Protection is enabled.Protection TOSHIBA HDD Protection is active. The hard disk drive head is in a safe position.OFF TOSHIBA HDD Protection is disabled.
User’s Manual 4-55Operating BasicsDetailsTo open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties window.Detection Level AmplificationWhen the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to the maximum for 10 seconds.TOSHIBA HDD Protection MessageSpecify whether to display a message when TOSHIBA HDD Protection is active.Heat dispersalTo protect against overheating, the processor is equipped an internal temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You are able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on the fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan - these functions are controlled within the Power Options.When the processor's temperature falls to a normal range, the fan will be turned off and the processor operation returned to its standard speed.■This 3D object virtually represents the Computer's internal Hard Disk Drive. This representation may vary from the actual number of disks, disk rotation, head movement, part size, shape and direction.■This feature may use a large amount of CPU and memory on some models. The computer may become slow or sluggish when attempting to run other applications while the 3D Viewer is displayed.■Intensely shaking the computer or other subjecting it to strong impacts may cause damage to the computer.This function does not work when the computer is starting, in Sleep Mode, in Hibernation Mode, in transition to Hibernation Mode, recovering from Hibernation Mode, or powered off. Be sure to not subject the computer to vibration or impact while the function is disabled.If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.
User’s Manual 5-1Chapter 5The KeyboardThe computer's keyboard layouts are compatible with a 104/105-key enhanced keyboard - by pressing some keys in combination, all of the 104/105-key enhanced keyboard functions can be performed on the computer.The number of keys available on your keyboard will depend on which country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being available for numerous languages.In use there are six different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys, function keys, soft keys, Hot keys, Windows special keys and the keypad overlay.Typewriter keysThe typewriter keys produce the upper-case and lower-case letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the screen. However, there are some differences between using a typewriter and using a computer keyboard:■Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces, which are created by a 'space character' may also vary depending on line justification and other factors.■The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one), together with the uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero), are not interchangeable on computers as they are on a typewriter.■The CAPS LOCK function key locks only the alphabetic characters into upper-case while the Shift Lock function on a typewriter places all keys in the shifted position.■The SHIFT keys, the Tab key, and the BACK SPACE key perform the same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special computer functions.Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause damage to the parts under the key caps.
User’s Manual 5-2The KeyboardFunction keys: F1 … F12The function keys (not to be confused with the special FN key) are the twelve keys at the top of your keyboard - these keys function differently from other keys.F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute programmed functions when pressed and, when used in combination with the FN key, those keys marked with icons also execute specific functions on the computer. Please refer to the section, Soft keys: FN key combinations, in this chapter for further information, taking care to note that the function executed by individual keys will depend on the software you are using.Soft keys: FN key combinationsThe FN (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.Emulating keys on an enhanced keyboardFigure 5-1 A 104-key enhanced keyboard layoutThis computer's keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 104-key enhanced keyboard.Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys, some of the enhanced keyboard functions must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the larger keyboard.The FN key can be combined with the following keys to simulate functions similar to those of keys on the 104/105 key enhanced keyboard which are not on this computer's keyboard.Please note that some software may disable or interfere with soft-key operations, and that the soft-key settings are not restored when the computer returns from Sleep Mode.
User’s Manual 5-3The KeyboardPress FN + F10 or FN + F11 to access the computer's integrated keypad. When activated, the keys with grey markings on their bottom edge become either numeric keypad keys (FN + F11) or cursor control keys (FN + F10).Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more information on how to operate these keys, taking care to note that the power on default for both settings is off.Press FN +F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power on default is off.Press FN +ENTER to simulate ENTER on the enhanced keyboard’s numeric keypad.Hot keysHot keys (pressing FN + a function or ESC key) let you enable or disable certain features of the computer.Mute: Pressing FN + ESC turns the volume on and off.Lock: Pressing FN + F1 enters ''Lock computer mode''. To restore your desktop, you need to log on again.Power Plan: Pressing FN + F2 changes the power settings.
User’s Manual 5-4The KeyboardSleep: Pressing FN + F3 switches the system to Sleep Mode.Hibernate: Pressing FN + F4 switches the system to Hibernation Mode.Output: Pressing FN + F5 changes the active display device.Brightness Down: Pressing FN + F6 decreases the computer's display panel brightness in individual steps.Brightness Up: Pressing FN + F7 increases the computer's display panel brightness in individual steps.Wireless: Pressing FN + F8 switches the active wireless devices if the wireless communication switch is switched on.Touch Pad: Pressing FN + F9 enables or disables the Touch Pad function. Zoom: Pressing FN + Space changes the display resolution.If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.
User’s Manual 5-5The KeyboardODD: Pressing FN + Tab turns the power of the optical disc drive on/off or ejects the disc tray.TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): Pressing FN + 1 reduces the icon size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application windows.TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): Pressing FN + 2 enlarges the icon size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application windows.FN Sticky keyYou can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the FN key sticky, that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an "F Number"key. To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility utility, click Start -> All Programs-> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Accessibility.Windows special keysThe keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows, the Windows Start Button key activates the Start menu while the application key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.This key activates the Windows Start menu.This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.
User’s Manual 5-6The KeyboardKeypad overlayYour computer's keyboard does not have a separate numeric keypad but includes a numeric keypad overlay which functions like one - this is located in the center of the keyboard with the relevant keys having grey letters at their front edge. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric keypad on a standard 104/105-key enhanced keyboard.Turning on the overlaysThe numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor and page control.Arrow ModeTo turn on Arrow Mode, press FN + F10 - the Arrow Mode indicator lights and you are able to access cursor and page control functions by using the keys. You are able to press FN + F10 again to turn off this overlay function.Numeric ModeTo turn on Numeric Mode, press FN + F11 - the Numeric Mode indicator lights and you are able to access numeric characters by using the keys. You are able to press FN + F11 again to turn off this overlay function.Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay
User’s Manual 5-7The KeyboardTemporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard functions without having to turn the overlay off:1. Hold down FN key and press any other key - this key will operate as if the overlay were off.2. Type upper-case characters by holding down FN + SHIFT and pressing a character key.3. Release FN key to continue using the selected overlay function.Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)While using the normal keyboard function, you can temporarily use the keypad overlay without having to turn it on:1. Hold down FN key.2. Check the keyboard indicators as pressing the FN key will turn on the most recently used overlay function - if the Numeric Mode indicator lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry, while if the Arrow Mode indicator lights, you can use the overlay for cursor and page control function.3. Release FN key to return to normal keyboard operation.Temporarily changing modesIf the computer is in Numeric Mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow Mode by pressing a SHIFT key, while if it is in Arrow Mode, you can switch temporarily to Numeric Mode by also pressing a SHIFT key.Generating ASCII charactersNot all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard operation, but you are able to generate these characters using their specific ASCII codes.With the overlay on:1. Hold down ALT key.2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you require.3. Release ALT - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.With the overlay off:1. Hold down ALT + FN.2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you require.3. Release ALT + FN - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.
User’s Manual 6-1Chapter 6Power and Power-Up ModesThe computer's power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and any internal batteries. This chapter provides details on making the most effective use of these resources, and includes information on charging and changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and information on the different power-up modes.Power conditionsThe computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is connected, whether a battery pack is installed and what the charge level is for that battery. Table 6-1 Power conditions Power onPower off (no operation)ACadaptor connectedMain Battery fully charged • Operates • No charge • LED: Battery greenDC IN green • No charge • LED: Battery greenDC IN greenMain Battery partially charged or no charge • Operates • Charge*1 • LED: Battery orangeDC IN green • Quick charge*1 • LED: Battery orangeDC IN greenNo Main battery installed • Operates • No charge • LED: Battery offDC IN green • No charge • LED: Battery offDC IN green
User’s Manual 6-2Power and Power-Up ModesTable 6-1 Power conditions continued Power onPower off (no operation)ACadaptor connected2nd battery fully charged • Operates • No charge • LED: 2nd battery greenDC IN green • No charge • LED: 2nd battery greenDC IN green2nd battery partially charged or no charge • Operates • Charge*2 • LED: 2nd battery orangeDC IN green • Quick charge*2 • LED: 2nd battery orangeDC IN greenNo 2nd battery installed • Operates • No charge • LED: 2nd battery offDC IN green • No charge • LED: 2nd battery offDC IN greenACadaptor not connectedMain battery charge is above low battery trigger point • Operates • LED: Battery offDC IN offMain battery charge is below low battery trigger point • Operates • LED: Battery flashes orangeDC IN offMain battery charge is exhausted Computer shuts down *3No main battery installed • No operation *4 • LED: Battery offDC IN off
User’s Manual 6-3Power and Power-Up ModesTable 6-1 Power conditions continued1 When the Slice Expansion Battery is not charging.*2 When the main battery is not charging.*3 For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode, the Hibernation feature must be enabled in Power Options. If a main battery and a Slice Expansion Battery are installed, the computer does not shut down until the charge in both batteries is exhausted.*4 When no Slice Expansion Battery is installed.*5 When no main battery is installed. Power onPower off (no operation)ACadaptor not connected2nd battery charge is above low battery trigger point • Operates • LED: 2nd battery offDC IN off2nd battery charge is below low battery trigger point • Operates • LED: 2nd batteryflashes orangeDC IN off2nd battery charge is exhaustedComputer shuts down *3No 2nd battery is installed • No operation *5 • LED: 2nd battery offDC IN offWhen batteries are charged, the main battery is charged first. When it is fully charged, the Slice Expansion Battery is charged.
User’s Manual 6-4Power and Power-Up ModesMonitoring of power conditionAs shown in the below table, the Battery, 2nd battery, DC IN and Powerindicators on the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating capability and battery charge status.Battery indicatorCheck the Battery indicator to determine the status of the main battery and the 2nd battery indicator to determine the status of the Slice Expansion Battery. The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:DC IN indicatorCheck the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC adaptor connected - the following indicator conditions should be noted:Flashing orange The battery charge is low, the AC adaptor must be connected in order to recharge the battery.Orange Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is charging.Green Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is fully charged.No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.Green Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and is correctly supplying power to the computer.Flashing orange Indicates a problem with the power supply. You should initially try plugging the AC adaptor into another power outlet - if it still does not operate properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer.No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.
User’s Manual 6-5Power and Power-Up ModesPower indicatorCheck the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer - the following indicator conditions should be noted:BatteryThis section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling.Battery typesThe computer has three different types of batteries.Battery packWhen the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended use of the computer away from an AC power source although you should not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the computer, or place the computer into Hibernation Mode. Please be aware that, when placing the computer into Hibernation Mode, the contents of memory will be saved to the hard disk drive, although for safety sake, it is best to also save your data manually.Slice Expansion Battery (Is included some models)The Slice Expansion Battery is included with some models, or can be purchased separately as an optional accessory.For detailed information on this battery, refer to Connecting and disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery.Green Indicates power is being supplied to the computer and the computer is turned on.Blinking orange Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor or battery) to maintain this condition. In Sleep Mode, this indicator will turn on for one second and off for two seconds.No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.
User’s Manual 6-6Power and Power-Up ModesReal Time Clock (RTC) batteryThe Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged, the system will lose this information and the real time clock and calendar will stop working - in this instance the following message will be displayed when you turn on the power:S**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent **** Press [F1] key to set Date/Time. You can change the Real Time Clock settings by turning the computer on while pressing the ESC key and then the F1 key when prompted. Please refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for further information.Care and use of the battery packThis section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle your battery pack properly.Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions.The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if the AC adaptor is attached.■Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.■Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause injury.■The battery pack and Slice Expansion Battery are lithium ion battery, which can explode if not replaced, used, handled or disposed of properly. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.■The computer's RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The battery can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. ■Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and 35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak, battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might be shortened.■Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data could be lost.
User’s Manual 6-7Power and Power-Up ModesCharging the batteriesWhen the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator will flash orange to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data, and automatically turn itself off.You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.ProceduresTo recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working outlet - the Battery indicator will glow orange while the battery is being charged.TimeThe following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a discharged battery.Charging time (hours)■Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable the Wake-up on LAN function.■Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function.Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or optional TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to charge the battery pack with any other charger.Battery type Power on Power offBattery pack (4700mAh) about 3.0 to 13.0 about 3.0Slice Expansion Battery (4000mAh) about 3.0 to 9.5 about 2.5RTC battery 24 Doesn't chargePlease be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you are using the computer - if you make heavy use of external devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Please refer to the section Maximizing battery operating time,for further information.
User’s Manual 6-8Power and Power-Up ModesBattery charging noticeThe battery may not begin charging immediately under the following conditions:■The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity, you should charge it at room temperature of between 5° to 35°C (41° to 95°F).■The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging.The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:■The battery has not been used for a long time.■The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for a long time.■A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power on until the system automatically turns itself off.2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and to a wall outlet that is supplying power.3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal capacity.Monitoring battery capacityRemaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods.■Clicking the battery icon on the Taskbar■Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window■You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together with the current power consumption.■Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ slightly from the calculated time.■With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used, older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged.
User’s Manual 6-9Power and Power-Up ModesMaximizing battery operating timeA battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:■Processor speed■Screen brightness■System Sleep Mode■System Hibernation Mode■Display power off period■Hard disk drive power off period■How often and for how long you use the hard disk drive and external disk(c) drives, for example, optical disc and floppy diskette drive.■How much charge the battery contained to begin with.■How you use optional devices, such as a PC Cards, to which the battery supplies power.■Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if you are frequently turning the computer off and on.■Where you store your programs and data.■Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the keyboard - closing the display saves power.■The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low temperatures.■The condition of the battery terminals - you should always ensure the terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before installing the battery pack.Retaining data with power offWhen you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries retain data for the following approximate time periods:Retention timeBattery type State and Retention TimeBattery pack (4700mAh) about 2 days (Sleep Mode)about 75 days (Boot Mode)Slice Expansion Battery (4000mAh) about 2 days (Sleep Mode)about 65 days (Boot Mode)RTC battery 30 days
User’s Manual 6-10Power and Power-Up ModesExtending battery lifeTo maximize the life of your battery packs:■At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges. Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below.■If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.■If you will not be using the system for an extended period, for example for more than one month, remove the battery pack from the computer.■Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.Replacing the battery packPlease be aware that the battery pack is classified as a consumable item.The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through repeated charging and discharging, and will need to be replaced when it reaches the end of its operating life. In addition to this, you might also replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are operating your computer away from an AC power source for an extended period of time.This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack, and begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following steps.1. Turn off the computer's power.2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it does not turn on then go to Step 4.3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time, continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged, however, if the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN indicator should glow green, and the Battery indicator should glow orange to indicate that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the event that DC IN indicator does not glow this indicates that power is not being supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and the power cord.5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.■Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it could be lost.■In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.■Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery release latch and cause injuries.
User’s Manual 6-11Power and Power-Up ModesRemoving the battery packTo remove a discharged battery, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Save your work.2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.5. Slide the battery lock towards the release ( ) position to make the battery release latch movable.Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack (1)6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (1) to disengage the battery pack and then remove it from the computer (2).Figure 6-2 Releasing the battery pack (2)Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.Battery packBattery lockBattery packBattery releaselatch
User’s Manual 6-12Power and Power-Up ModesInstalling the battery packTo install a battery pack, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Insert the battery pack as far as it will go into the computer (1).2. Ensure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery lock (2) is in its ( ) position.Figure 6-3 Securing the battery pack3. Turn your computer over.Connecting and disconnecting the Slice Expansion BatteryThis battery pack increases your computer's operating time when a main battery pack is also installed.This section explains how to connect and disconnect the Slice Expansion Battery, and begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following steps.Connecting the Slice Expansion BatteryTo connect the Slice Expansion Battery to the computer, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Be sure the computer’s power is off and all cables are disconnected.2. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery release latch and cause injuries.Battery lockBattery packWhen handling Slice Expansion Battery, be careful not to short circuit the terminals. Also do not drop, hit or otherwise apply impact; do not scratch or break the casing and do not twist or bend the latches of it.Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.
User’s Manual 6-13Power and Power-Up Modes3. Remove the protective cap from the Slice Expansion Battery.4. Open latches on the Slice Expansion Battery and fit a tab on the battery into the docking port on the underside of the computer.Figure 6-4 Seating the Slice Expansion Battery5. Close the latches to secure the Slice Expansion Battery to the computer.Figure 6-5 Securing the latchesDisconnecting the Slice Expansion BatteryTo disconnect the Slice Expansion Battery from the computer, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Save your work.2. Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.3. Remove all cables connected to the computer.4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.TabTabTabLatchesDocking portLatchesAlways make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before turning the computer upside down.
User’s Manual 6-14Power and Power-Up Modes5. Open the release latches in the direction of the arrows.Figure 6-6 Releasing the latches6. Lift off the Slice Expansion Battery.Figure 6-7 Removing the Slice Expansion Battery7. Be sure to replace the protective cap before storing the Slice Expansion Battery.TOSHIBA Password UtilityThe TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security: User and Supervisor.LatchesPasswords set by the TOSHIBA Password Utility function are different from the Windows password.
User’s Manual 6-15Power and Power-Up ModesUser PasswordTo start the utility, point to or click the following items:Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password UtilityThe User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password and User Token.User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using "TOSHIBA Password Utility" to delete or change passwords, or create tokens, etc. User Password field■Set (button)Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the computer. Check "Set the same string simultaneously as the HDD User Password" when setting the HDD User Password.■Delete (button)Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.■Change (button)Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.■Owner String (text box)You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a password.■After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking whether you want to save it to a floppy diskette or other media. If you forget the password, you can open the password file on another computer. Be sure to keep the media in a safe place.■When entering the character string to register the password, enter from the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the password file.■When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example "!" or "#") produced by pressing the SHIFT or ALT keys and so on.
User’s Manual 6-16Power and Power-Up ModesUser Token field■Create (button)You can use an SD Card token, instead of entering the password. After you have registered a password, insert an SD Card in SD Card slot and click Create. You can use an SD Card of any capacity, but it must be formatted correctly.If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted, you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the following items:Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Card Format■Disable (button)Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old tokens, but you can use the same SD Cards to create new tokens.■If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you can’t accept this risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.■If you want to register the HDD master Password or the password for the Ultra Slim Bay HDD, you can set them by the BIOS SETUP Program.■When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power in Chapter 1. Refer to Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program section in Chapter 7 for more information.When you format an SD memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to save data on the card to other media before you format the card.After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in the SD Card slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and stored in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of theft or a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's computer (resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the user is not at their desk.
User’s Manual 6-17Power and Power-Up ModesSupervisor PasswordIf you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password, execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:C:\Program Files\Toshiba\PasswordUtility\TOSPU.exeThis utility lets you do the following:■Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.■Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.■Specify restrictions for general users.Starting the computer by passwordIf you have already registered a password, there are four ways to start the computer:■Insert an SD Card token before you turn on the computer. The computer will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.■Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint System Boot Authentication. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BACK SPACEkey to skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe the fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication five times, you must enter the password manually to start the computer.■Log on with the Tablet PC Pen when in Tablet mode. Refer to Tablet mode section in this chapter.■Enter the password manually.To enter a password manually, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The following message will appear in the screen:SPassword=2. Enter the Password.3. Press ENTER.This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.The password is necessary only if the computer was Shutdown and Hibernation in Boot Mode.It is not needed in Sleep Mode and Restart.If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry password entry.
User’s Manual 6-18Power and Power-Up ModesTablet modeEnter your password by tapping the on-screen keyboard using the Tablet PC Pen or your finger.On-screen keyboard can not be used in Display screen model.Figure 6-8 On-screen keyboard■The beep sounds when tapping the on-screen keyboard with the Tablet PC Pen or your finger. An * (asterisk) is displayed after "Password ="and one character is input for every tapping.Power-up modesThe computer has three different power-up modes as follows:■Boot Mode : The computer will shut down without saving data - in view of this you must always save your work before you turn the computer off.■Hibernation Mode : Data in memory will be saved to the hard disk drive.■Sleep Mode : Data will be maintained in the computer's memory.Windows utilitiesYou can configure various settings associated with both Sleep Mode and Hibernation Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> ControlPanel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).Register your password to the computer in the Laptop mode using the standard keyboard. Refer to TOSHIBA Password Utility, in this chapter for the detail.Please refer to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the power in Chapter 1, Getting Started for further information.
User’s Manual 6-19Power and Power-Up ModesHot keysYou can use the FN + F3 hot key to enter Sleep Mode or FN + F4 to enter Hibernation Mode - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further details.Panel power on/offYou can set up your computer so that power is turned off automatically when you close the display panel, and turned on again when you open it. Please note that this function is only available for Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, not for Boot Mode.System Auto OffThis feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set period of time, and can be configured for both Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode.If the panel power off function is enabled, and you manually shut down Windows, do not close the display panel until the shut down process has been completed.
User’s Manual 7-1Chapter 7HW Setup & BIOS SetupThis chapter explains how to use the TOSHIBA HW Setup program to configure your computer, and provides information on settings for various functions.Accessing HW SetupTo run the HW Setup program, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HWSetup.HW Setup windowThe HW Setup window contains a number of tabs (General, Display, Boot Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config and USB) to allow specific functions of the computer to be configured.In addition there are also three buttons : OK,Cancel and Apply.OK Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup window. Cancel Closes the window without accepting your changes. Apply Accepts all your changes without closing the HW Setup window.
User’s Manual 7-2HW Setup & BIOS SetupGeneralThis window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons : Default and About.SetupThis field displays the installed BIOS version and date.DisplayThis tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the internal display or an external monitor.Power On DisplayThis tab allows you to select the display to be used when the computer is started. Please note that this setting is only available on standard VGA mode and is not available as part of the Windows Desktop properties.Default Return all HW Setup values to the factory settings.About Display the HW Setup version. Auto-Selected Selects an external monitor if one is connected, otherwise, it selects the internal display (default).LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal display and an external monitor for simultaneous display.System LCD Only Selects the internal display even if the external monitor is connected.If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any image on the external monitor.
User’s Manual 7-3HW Setup & BIOS SetupBoot PriorityBoot Priority OptionsThis tab allows you to select the priority for booting the computer - the following settings are available:You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting: *1 The floppy diskette drive will be used to start the computer when there is a bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory card is installed as well, the external floppy diskette drive will be checked first, followed by the SD memory device itself.*2The optical disc drive will be used to start the computer when there is a bootable disk contained in the drive.FDD !HDD !CD-ROM !LANThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2. hard disk drive, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.HDD !FDD !CD-ROM !LANThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. floppy diskette drive*1, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.FDD !CD-ROM !LAN !HDDThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2. CD-ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. hard disk drive.HDD !CD-ROM !LAN !FDDThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. CD-ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.CD-ROM !LAN !FDD !HDDThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3. floppy diskette drive*1, 4. hard disk drive.CD-ROM !LAN !HDD !FDDThe computer looks for bootable files on devices in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3. hard disk drive, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.USelects the USB floppy diskette drive.NSelects the network.1Selects the built-in hard disk drive.2Selects the secondary hard disk drive.CSelects the CD-ROM*2.MSelects the USB memory drive.
User’s Manual 7-4HW Setup & BIOS SetupTo change the boot drive, follow the steps below.1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in hard disk drive, Ultra Slim Bay hard disk drive, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD memory card), Network (LAN), USB Memory boot.3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and press ENTER.HDD Priority OptionsIf more than one hard disk drive is installed in the computer, this option allows you to set the priority associated with hard disk drive detection - the first hard disk drive detected that has a valid boot command on it will be the device from which the computer will start.Please note that a highlighted bar will only appear under the selected device.If a Supervisor Password has been set, manual boot device selection functions may be restricted.The boot device selection methods described above will not change the boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and available settings in HW Setup.Built-in HDD -> 2nd HDD -> USB (Default)The priority is set as built-in HDD -> 2nd HDD -> USB.2nd HDD -> Built-in HDD -> USBThe priority is set as 2nd HDD -> built-in HDD -> USB.Built-in HDD -> USB -> 2nd HDDThe priority is set as built-in HDD -> USB -> 2nd HDD.2nd HDD -> USB -> Built-in HDDThe priority is set as 2nd HDD -> USB -> built-in HDD.USB -> Built-in HDD -> 2nd HDDThe priority is set as USB -> built-in HDD -> 2nd HDD.USB -> 2nd HDD -> Built-in HDDThe priority is set as USB -> 2nd HDD -> built-in HDD.
User’s Manual 7-5HW Setup & BIOS SetupUSB Memory BIOS Support TypeThis option allows you to set the type of the USB memory to be used as a startup device.KeyboardWake-up on KeyboardWhen this feature is enabled, and the computer is in Sleep Mode, you can turn on the system by pressing any key. However, please be aware that this option will only work with the internal keyboard and only when the computer is in Sleep Mode.■If a boot command is not found on the first detected hard disk drive, the system will not boot from next hard disk drive in the list, instead it will search for the next device in the Boot Priority list and startup from this as appropriate.■Please be aware that some modules may not be displayed.HDD Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a hard disk drive (default). With this setting, the USB memory device can be used to start the computer as though it were a hard disk drive based on the hard disk drive settings within both the Boot Priority and HDD Priority options detailed previously.FDD Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a floppy diskette drive. With this setting, the USB memory device can be used to start the computer as though it were a floppy diskette based on the floppy diskette drive settings within the Boot Priority option detailed previously.Enabled Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.Disabled Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).
User’s Manual 7-6HW Setup & BIOS SetupCPUThis function allows you to set the processor's operating mode.Dynamic CPU Frequency ModeThis option allows you to configure the power saving modes associated with the processor - the following settings are available:LANWake-up on LANThis feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a wake-up signal from the LAN.Power will be automatically turned on when a signal is received from an administrator's computer which is connected via a network.The following settings can be changed when the Built-in LAN is Enabled.Connect the AC adaptor when using the Wake-up on LAN function. The battery retention time will be shorter than the times listed in this manual when this function is enabled. Refer to the section in chapter 6, Retaining data with power off.Dynamically SwitchableThe processor's power consumption and automatic clock speed switching functions are enabled - in use the processor's operation is automatically switched when necessary (default).Always High The processor's power consumption and automatic clock speed switching functions are disabled - in use the processor will always run at its highest level of power consumption and its highest speed.Always Low The processor's power consumption and automatic clock speed switching functions are disabled - in use the processor will always run at a lower level of power consumption and a low speed.Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is enabled.■The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.■To enable it, you must check both the "Allow the device to wake the computer" and "Only allow management stations to wake the computer" check box within the "Intel Network Connection".Enabled Enables Wake-up on LAN (Default).Disabled Disables Wake-up on LAN.
User’s Manual 7-7HW Setup & BIOS SetupBuilt-in LANThis feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.Device ConfigDevice ConfigurationThis option allows you to set how the computer's hardware devices will be configured.USBUSB KB/Mouse Legacy EmulationYou can use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy emulation so that, even if your operating system does not support USB devices, you can still use a standard USB mouse and keyboard - to achieve this you should set the appropriate option(s) to Enabled.USB-FDD Legacy EmulationUse this option to enable or disable USB floppy diskette drive legacy emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB floppy diskette drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulationitem to Enabled.Enabled Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).Disabled Disables Built-in LAN functions.All Devices The computer's BIOS will setup and configure all devices.Setup by OS The operating system will setup and configure all of the devices that it can control (default).Enabled Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation function (Default).Disabled Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation function.Enabled Enables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy emulation function (Default).Disabled Disables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy emulation function.
User’s Manual 7-8HW Setup & BIOS SetupBIOS Setup ProgramSettings for some features are carried out in the BIOS setup program.Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup ProgramStarting the BIOS Setup Program1. Turn on the computer while pressing the ESC key - if the Password =prompt is displayed, enter either the Supervisor Password, if one is set, or the User Password and press the ENTER key. Please refer to Chapter 6, the TOSHIBA Password Utility for further details about the User Password.2. At the Check system. Then press [F1] key. prompt, press the F1 key - the BIOS setup application will start up.Ending the BIOS Setup ProgramIn order to save the changes you have made and end the BIOS setup application, follow the steps as detailed below:1. Press the END key - this will cause the Are you sure? (Y/N). The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.prompt to be displayed at the bottom of the screen.2. Press the Y key - this will save the configuration changes and end the BIOS setup application, automatically restarting the computer.Notes Before Using the BIOS Setup Application■In most cases, changes to the system's configuration should be made within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup,TOSHIBA Password Utility,Windows Device Manager and so forth. If you make changes to the configuration through the BIOS setup program, please be aware that the configuration set through the Windows applications will take priority.■Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be erased even if the power supply is turned off and the main battery removed. However, if the built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) battery runs out of power, most of the settings will revert back to their default values. However, please note that the following items will not be affected in this instance:• Password• Hard Disk Drive Password• Security Controller• Fingerprint patternsPlease refer to the operating instructions displayed in the settings screen.
User’s Manual 7-9HW Setup & BIOS SetupEnding the BIOS Setup Program HalfwayThe configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of the changes made by following the steps detailed below:1. Press the ESC key - the Exit without saving? (Y/N) prompt to be displayed at the bottom of the screen.2. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application will exit and the computer will automatically restart.Supervisor PasswordThis setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen, Allows you to register a Supervisor Password of the computer.Core Multi - ProcessingThe Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode. Enabled is Dual Core mode.Disabled is Single Core mode.Not Registered Supervisor Password has not been registered (Default).Registered Supervisor Password has been registered.The User Password and Supervisor Password configured in BIOS SETUP can also be changed or deleted using the TOSHIBA Password Utility.When unable to perform the following operations, use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to change the configuration or delete the Supervisor Password.■Configuration changes in the BIOS Setup Program■Configuration changes in the HW Setup utility■Selection of the startup device during computer recoveryEnabled Enables Core Multi - Processing functions (Default).Disabled Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.
User’s Manual 7-10HW Setup & BIOS SetupVirtualization TechnologyVirtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel® Virtualization Technology installed in the CPU.Intel® Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to operate as multiple virtual machines.The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel® Virtualization Technology.The Enabled command allows use of the Intel® Virtualization Technology.Enhanced C-StatesThis feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.Execute-Disable Bit CapabilityThis setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen, configures the Execute-Disable Bit function of the computer's processor. This function is specific to Intel® processors and, when activated, helps to reduce security threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of malicious 'buffer overflow' attacks when combined with a supporting operating system such as Windows Vista®.The Virtualization Technology is supported with some models.Enabled Enables Virtualization Technology.Disabled Disables Virtualization Technology (Default).Enabled This lowers the power consumption (Default).Disabled This does not lower the power consumption.Available Makes the processor's Execute-Disable Bit Capability available for use (Default).Not Available Disables the processor's Execute-Disable Bit Capability so that it is not available for use.
User’s Manual 7-11HW Setup & BIOS SetupAuto Power OnThis is a function for automatically turning on the computer. This item shows the current Auto Power On setting. When Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, or Critical Battery Wake-up are Enabled, Auto Power On is also Enabled.Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, on Battery and Critical Battery Wake-up can be configured under OPTIONS.on BatteryThe setting is available when the Wake-up on LAN is Enabled.Critical Battery Wake-upConfigures what action is taken when the remaining battery power is close to running out while the system is in Sleep Mode.This setting is only available when the Critical battery action in Windows is set to Hibernate (Default).To access it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options -> Edit Plan Settings -> Change advanced power settings -> Battery.The operation of this function is dependent upon battery status.Enabled Either Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, or Critical Battery Wake-up is set to Enabled (Default).Disabled Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, and Critical Battery Wake-up are Disabled.Enabled Enables Wake-up on LAN function when operating from the battery.Disabled Disables Wake-up on LAN function when operating from the battery (Default).Enabled When the remaining battery power is about to run out while the system is in Sleep Mode, the system is automatically woken up and then switched to Hibernation Mode (Default).Disabled No action is taken even if the remaining battery power is about to run out while the system is in Sleep Mode.
User’s Manual 7-12HW Setup & BIOS SetupSecurity controllerPlease note that the security controller settings are available on the second page of the BIOS setup application.TPMThis setting enables or disables the computer's Trusted Platform Module (TPM) security controller.Clear TPM OwnerThis setting is used to erase the data stored as part of the Trusted Platform Module, as would be required, for example, when disposing of the computer or when the owner of the computer changes. Once this operation is carried out, the Trusted Platform Module configuration settings are erased such that any encrypted data can no longer be decrypted and the files can no longer be read. In view of this you must ensure that you backup or delete the data as necessary before carrying out this operation.The procedure to follow is as detailed below:1. Move the cursor to the Clear TPM Owner setting and press either the Space key or BACK SPACE key.2. A message is displayed at which you should press the Y,E,S, and ENTER keys in sequence - the Trusted Platform Module information will then be erased.3. The Trusted Platform Module setting will then change from being Enable to Disabled and the setting no longer displayed.Diagnostic ModeAllows you to set whether the BIOS diagnostic test is enabled or disabled.The Trusted Platform Module security controller is supported with some models.Enabled Enable Trusted Platform Module security.Disabled Disable Trusted Platform Module security (default).When using TPM, please refer to the Infineon TPM Installation Guidefrom the C:\TOSAPINS\Infineon TPM Installation Guide and ensure that the user reads as it contains usage information and notes on using TPM security.Disabled The diagnostic test is disabled (Default).Enabled The diagnostic test is enabled.
User’s Manual 7-13HW Setup & BIOS SetupSATA Controller ModeThis feature sets the SATA Controller Mode.USB Sleep and Charge functionThis section describes the settings for "USB Sleep and Charge function". For more information, please refer to the USB Sleep and Charge functionsection in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.The default setting in BIOS Setup is [Disabled]. Changing the setting to [Enabled] enables the use of this function. There are two modes, Mode-1 and Mode-2 in [Enabled]. For normal use, set the setting to Mode-1. The SATA Controller Mode is supported with some models.AHCI Sets AHCI which is the mode for Windows Vista®(Default).Compatibility Sets the mode for legacy OS. Use this mode when the driver corresponding to AHCI is not used.If the function does not work with Mode-1 setting, change it to Mode-2. Some external devices may not be able to use this function in either mode. When this happens, change the setting to [Disabled]. Enabled (Mode-1) Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.Enabled (Mode-2) Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.Disabled Disables USB Sleep and Charge function (Default).
User’s Manual 8-1Chapter 8TroubleshootingTOSHIBA have designed this computer for durability, however, should problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter to help determine the cause.All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.Problem solving processResolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following guidelines:■Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy valuable problem related information that can help solve the problem.■Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred. If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the computer's PRTSC key.Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may require help from your reseller, dealer or service provider - if you find you need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible.
User’s Manual 8-2TroubleshootingPreliminary checklistYou should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem:■Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you are using.■Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the new device.■Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the computer's setup program and that all required driver software has been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the optional accessories for further information on its installation and configuration).■Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.■Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for loose pins.■Check that your floppy diskette, CD or DVD media is correctly loaded and, in the case of a floppy diskette, that its write protect tab is correctly set.Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to your reseller, dealer or service provider. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log you have made will help to identify the problem faster.Analyzing the problemSometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions in mind:■Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, hard disk drive, display panel, touch pad, touch pad control buttons - as each device will produce different symptoms.■Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its configuration is set properly.■What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the PRTSC key and, if possible, look up the messages in the documentation included with the computer, software or operating system.■Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.■Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.
User’s Manual 8-3Troubleshooting■Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to your reseller, dealer or service provider.Hardware and system checklistThis section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:Software The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If you cannot load a software package, the media may be damaged or the program might be corrupted - in these instances try loading another copy of the software if possible.If an error message appears while you are using a software package you should refer to the documentation supplied with it as this will usually include a problem solving section or a summary of error messages.Next, you should check any error messages against the operating system documentation.Hardware If you cannot find a software problem, you should then check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First run through the items in the preliminary checklist as described previously then, if you still cannot correct the problem, try to identify the source - the next section provides checklists for individual components and peripherals.Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury or may damage your computer.■System start-up■Self test■Power■Password■Keyboard■Internal display panel■Hard disk drive■DVD Super Multi drive■USB floppy diskette drive■PC Card■Smart Card■SD/SDHC Card■Memory Stick■xD picture card■MultiMediaCard■Pointing Device■Fingerprint Sensor■USB device■Additional memory module■Sound system■External monitor■i.LINK (IEEE1394) device■Modem■LAN■Wireless LAN■Bluetooth■Recovery Discs
User’s Manual 8-4TroubleshootingSystem start-up When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:■Self Test■Power Sources■Power-on Password Self test While booting up the computer, self test is executed automatically and the TOSHIBA logo is displayed on the screen.This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system according to how the Boot Priority option is set within the TOSHIBA HW Setup program.If any of the following conditions are present, the self test has failed:■The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or messages except for the TOSHIBA logo.■Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not function normally.■The screen displays an error message.In these instances, turn off the computer, check all cable connections and then restart it - if the self test fails again, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.PowerWhen the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one having the ability to produce apparent power problems.This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot resolve a problem after following them, the cause may lie with another power related resource - in such an instance you should contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Overheating power downIn the event that the computer's internal operating temperature becomes too high, the system will automatically enter either Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode and shut itself down.Problem ProcedureComputer shuts down and DC IN indicator blinks orange Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator stops blinking.
User’s Manual 8-5TroubleshootingAC powerIf you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected you should check the status of the DC IN indicator. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.BatteryIf you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on these indicators, together with general battery operation.It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.If the computer has reached room temperature and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts down quickly, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Computer shuts down and its DC IN indicator is flashing greenThis indicates a problem with the heat dispersal system - you should contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureAC adaptor doesn’t power the computer (DC IN indicator does not glow green)Check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the computer and a working power outlet.Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If the cord is frayed or damaged it should be replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.If the AC adaptor still does not power the computer, you should contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureBattery doesn’t power the computer The battery may be discharged - connect the AC adaptor to recharge the battery.
User’s Manual 8-6TroubleshootingBattery doesn’t charge when the AC adaptor is attached (Batteryindicator does not glow orange).If the battery is completely discharged, it will not begin charging immediately, in these instances you should wait a few minutes before trying again. If the battery still does not charge, you should check that the power outlet the AC adaptor is connected to is supplying power - this can be tested by plugging another appliance into it.Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the touch - if so, it will not charge properly and should be allowed to reach room temperature before you try again.Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to make sure its connecting terminals are clean - if necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth lightly dipped in alcohol.Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery, taking care to ensure that it is securely seated in the computer.Check the Battery indicator - if it does not glow, allow the computer to charge the battery for at least twenty minutes. If the Battery indicator starts to glow after this period, allow the battery to continue to charge for at least another twenty minutes before turning on the computer. However, if the indicator still does not glow, the battery may be at the end of its operating life and should be replaced. However, if you do not believe the battery is at the end of its operating life, you should speak to your reseller, dealer or service provider.Battery doesn’t power the computer as long as expectedIf you frequently recharge a partially charged battery, the battery might not charge to its full potential - in these instances you should fully discharge the battery and then attempt to charge it again.Check the Power saver option under Select a power plan in the Power Options.Problem Procedure
User’s Manual 8-7TroubleshootingReal Time ClockPasswordKeyboardKeyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the computer - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further information.Problem ProcedureThe following message is Displayed on the screen:RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent. Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.The charge in the Real Time Clock (RTC) battery has run out - you will need to set the date and time in the BIOS setup application by using the following steps:1. Press the F1 key - the BIOS setup application will load.2. Set the date in the System Date field.3. Set the time in the System Time field.4. Press the END key - a confirmation message will be displayed.5. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application will end and the computer will restart.Problem ProcedureCannot enter password Please refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utilitysection in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.Problem ProcedureSome letter keys produce numbers Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not activated - press the FN + F11 hot key and try typing again.Output to screen is garbled Please refer to your software's documentation to ensure that its is not remapping the keyboard in any way (remapping involves changing or reassigning the function of each key).If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you should contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-8TroubleshootingInternal display panelApparent computer's display panel problems may be related to the computer's setup and configuration - please refer to Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup, for further information.Hard disk driveProblem ProcedureNo display Press the FN + F5 hot keys to adjust the display priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to an external monitor.Markings appear on the computer's display panel.These marks may have come from contact with the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display panel has been closed. You should try to remove the marks by gently wiping the display panel with a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance you should always follow the instructions with the screen cleaner and always ensure you let the display panel dry properly before closing it.Problems above remain unresolved or other problems occurYou should initially refer to the documentation supplied with you software to determine if it is this that is causing the problems. Alternatively you may wish to run the TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool to check the general operation of the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureComputer does not boot from hard disk driveCheck to see whether that is a floppy diskette in the floppy diskette drive or a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM in the optical disc drive - if so remove it and try to start the computer again. If this has no effect, check the Boot Prioritysetting within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility - please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup for further information.Please refer to your operating system documentation in order to determine whether there is a problem with any of the operating system files or settings.
User’s Manual 8-9TroubleshootingDVD Super Multi driveFor more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Slow performance The files on the hard disk drive may be fragmented - in this instance you should run the disk Defragmentation utility to check the condition of your files and the hard disk drive. Please refer to the operating system's documentation or online Help File for further information on operating and using the Defragmentation utility.As a last resort you should reformat the hard disk drive and then reload the operating system and all other files and data. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureProblem ProcedureYou cannot access a CD/DVD in the driveMake sure the drive’s disc tray is securely closed.Press gently until it clicks into place.Check whether the drive power is on. If the power is off, press the FN + Tab hot key and turn on the power.Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is properly seated. It should lie flat with the label facing up.A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.Some CD/DVDs run correctly, but others do notThe software or hardware configuration may be causing a problem. Make sure the hardware configuration matches your software’s needs. Check the CD/DVD's documentation.
User’s Manual 8-10TroubleshootingUSB floppy diskette driveFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The drive supports:DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-VideoCD-ROM: CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM(single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing Method 2Recordable DVD: DVD-R/-R DL, DVD+R/+R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-RAMCheck the region code on the DVD. It must match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region codes are listed in the Optical disc drives section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.Problem ProcedureDrive does not operate Check the connection between the computer and the drive to ensure that it is properly attached.Some programs run correctly but others do notThe computer's software or hardware configuration may be causing a problem - ensure that these configurations match your requirements (refer to any relevant documentation, for example that supplied with any software in use, for further information).You cannot access the external floppy diskette driveTry another floppy diskette in the drive - if you are able to access this disk then it indicates the original disk and not the drive is probably causing the problem.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-11TroubleshootingPC CardFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.Smart CardFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.SD/SDHC CardFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.Problem ProcedurePC Card error occurs Remove the PC Card from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.In the event that the PC Card is attached to an external peripheral device, ensure that this connection is properly made.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your PC Card for further information.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureSmart Card error occurs Remove the Smart Card from the computer, make sure to confirm that the card oriented correctly and reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your Smart Card for further information.Problem ProcedureSD/SDHC Card error occursRemove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your SD/SDHC Card for further information.You cannot write to an SD/SDHC Card Remove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer and check to ensure that it is not write protected.
User’s Manual 8-12TroubleshootingMemory StickFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.xD picture cardFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on the SD/SDHC Card that is inserted into the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureProblem ProcedureMemory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo error occursRemove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo for further information.You cannot write to an Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO DuoRemove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer and check to ensure that it is not write protected.You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on the Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo that is inserted into the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedurexD picture card error occursRemove the xD picture card from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your xD picture card for further information.
User’s Manual 8-13TroubleshootingMultiMediaCardFor further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.Pointing deviceIf you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USBdevice section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your mouse.Touch PadYou cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on the xD picture card that is inserted into the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureProblem ProcedureMultiMediaCard error occurs Remove the MultiMediaCard from the computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly connected.If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your MultiMediaCard for further information.You cannot write to a MultiMediaCardRemove the MultiMediaCard from the computer and check to ensure that it is not write protected.You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on the MultiMediaCard that is inserted into the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureOn-screen pointer does not respond to pointing device operationIn this instance the system might be busy - Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while.
User’s Manual 8-14TroubleshootingDouble-tapping does not work In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouseicon.2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Buttons tab.3. Set the double-click speed as required and click OK.The mouse pointer moves too fast or too slowIn this instance, you should initially try changing the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouseicon.2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Pointer Options tab.3. Set the pointer speed as required and click OK.The reaction of Touch pad is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough.Adjust the touch Sensitivity.1. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse icon.2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Advanced tab.3. Click the Advanced feature settings...button.4. Advanced feature settings is displayed.5. Within the Pointer speed and tapping settings, click Settings... button.6. Detailed Touch Pad settings window is displayed.7. Move the slider bar to adjust the sensitivity in the Touch Sensitivity.8. Click OK button.9. Click the OK button on Advanced feature setting screen.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem Procedure
User’s Manual 8-15TroubleshootingUSB mouseProblem ProcedureOn-screen pointer does not respond to mouse operationIn this instance the system might be busy - Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while.Remove the mouse from the computer and then reconnect it to a free USB port it in order to ensure it is firmly attached.Double-clicking does not work In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.1. To access this utility, click Start -> ControlPanel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouseicon.2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Buttons tab.3. Set the double-click speed as required and click OK.The mouse pointer moves too fast or too slowIn this instance, you should initially try changing the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.1. To access this utility, click Start -> ControlPanel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouseicon.2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Pointer Options tab.3. Set the pointer speed as required and click OK.The mouse pointer moves erratically The elements of the mouse responsible for detecting movement might be dirty - please refer to the documentation supplied with the mouse for instructions on how to clean it.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-16TroubleshootingFingerprint SensorProblem ProcedureReading of the fingerprint was not successful.In this instance you should try the fingerprint reading operation again using the correct finger position - please refer to Using the Fingerprint Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further information.Alternatively, you should try the recognition process again using another enrolled finger.The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints.The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.The fingerprint cannot be read due to injuries to the finger.In this instance you should try the recognition process again using another enrolled finger. However, if fingerprints from all the enrolled fingers cannot be read, you should instead log into the computer by using the keyboard to input the password.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-17TroubleshootingUSB deviceIn addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the documentation supplied with your USB device.USB Sleep and Charge functionProblem ProcedureUSB device does not workRemove the USB device from the computer and then reconnect it to a free port it in order to ensure it is firmly attached.Ensure that any required USB device drivers are properly installed - to achieve this you should refer to both the device documentation and the operating system documentation.If you are using an operating system that does not support USB, you are still able to use a USB mouse and/or USB keyboard by setting the USBKB/Mouse Emulation option within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility to Enabled.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureI cannot use the "USB Sleep and Charge function".The setting of "USB Sleep and Charge function" may be [Disabled]. Change the setting to [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup.When there is a current overflow of the external device connected to the compatible port, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for safety reasons. When this happens, disconnect an external device if some external devices are connected. After that, turn the power of the computer ON/OFF to restore the function. If this function can not be still used even if only one external device is connected, stop using the external device because its current is over the acceptable value of this computer.
User’s Manual 8-18TroubleshootingProblem ProcedureSome external devices may not be able to use the "USB Sleep and Charge function". In this case, please try one or more of the following methods. ■Change a mode setting of [Enabled] by the BIOS Setup.■Turn OFF the computer while external devices are connected.■Connect external devices after turning OFF of the computer.If this function can not be still used, change the setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup and stop using this function.The battery depletes quickly even when I turned OFF the power of the computer. When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup, USB bus power (DC5V) will be supplied to the external device connected to the compatible port. If external device is connected to the compatible port when the AC adaptor is not connected to the computer, the battery of the computer will be depleted even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.Connect the AC adaptor to the computer or change the "USB Sleep and Charge function" setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup.Instead use an USB port that does not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon ( ).External devices connected to the compatible ports do not work when connected to a compatible port. Some external devices may not work when connected to a compatible port when the "USB Sleep and Charge function" is [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup.Reconnect the external device after turning ON the computer.If the external device still does not work, connect device to an USB port that does not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon ( ) or change the "USB Sleep and Charge function" setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup.
User’s Manual 8-19TroubleshootingAdditional memory modulePlease also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, for further information on installing and removing memory modules.Problem ProcedureThe "USB WakeUp function" does not work.When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup, the "USB WakeUp function" does not work for ports that support the USB Sleep and Charge function.In that case, use an USB port that does not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon ( ) or change the "USB Sleep and Charge function" setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup.Problem ProcedureIf there is a memory malfunction, the Powerindicator will repeatedly flash (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the following patterns;If there is an error in only slot A or no memory module is inserted in Slot A: orange twice, then green once.If there is an error in Slot B: orange once, then green twice.If there are errors in both Slot A and Slot B: orange twice, then green twice.In the event the Power indicator flashes when the computer is turned on, you should first check that the installed memory module(s) are compatible with the computer. If there is an error with a compatible memory module, there is a possibility the memory module is damaged.If you determine that an incompatible module has been installed, you should follow the steps as detailed below:1. Turn off the computer.2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral devices.3. Remove the battery pack.4. Remove the incompatible memory module.5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC adaptor.6. Turn on the computer.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.An error will occur if a memory module is inserted into Slot B while no memory module is inserted in Slot A.Remove the memory module from Slot B and insert it into Slot A.
User’s Manual 8-20TroubleshootingSound systemIn addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the documentation supplied with your audio device.Problem ProcedureNo sound is heard Adjust the volume control dial.Check the software volume settings.Please check to see if Mute is turned to OffCheck to make sure the headphone connection is secure.Check within the Windows Device Manager application to ensure the sound device is enabled and that the device is properly working.For further information, please refer to "Troubleshooting in Windows" section of Windows Help and Support.Annoying sound is heardIn this instance you may be experiencing feedback from either the internal microphone or an external microphone connected to the computer - please refer to Sound System in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further information.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-21TroubleshootingExternal monitorPlease also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, and to the documentation supplied with your monitor for further information.Problem ProcedureMonitor does not turn onAfter confirming that the monitor's power switch is on, you should check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the monitor and to a working power outlet.No display Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the external monitor.Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the display priority and ensure that it is not set for the internal display only.Check to see if the external monitor is connected.When the external monitor is set as the primary display device in extended desktop mode, it will not display when the computer wakes up from Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been disconnected while in Sleep Mode.To keep this from happening, do not disconnect the external monitor while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode.Remember to turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.When the display panel and an external monitor are set to clone mode and they are turned off by the timer, the display panel or the external monitor may not display when turned on again.If this occurs, press FN + F5 to re-set the display panel and external monitor to clone mode.Display error occurs Check that the cable connecting the external monitor to the computer is firmly attached.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-22Troubleshootingi.LINK (IEEE1394) deviceModemFor additional information, please also refer to Appendix C, AT Commandsand Appendix D, S-registers.Problem Procedurei.LINK device does not functionMake sure the cable is securely connected to the computer and to the device.Make sure the device’s power is turned on.Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows Control Panel and double-click the AddHardware icon. Follow the on-screen directions.Restart Windows.If problems persist, contact your dealer.This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.Problem ProcedureCommunication software can’t initialize modemMake sure the computer's internal modem settings are correct - please refer to the Phone and Modem Options link within the Windows Control Panel.You can hear a dial tone but can’t make a callIf the call is going through a Private Branch Exchange (PBX), take care to ensure that the communication application's tone dial detection feature is disabled.You are also able to use the ATX command - please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for further information.You place a call, but a connection can’t be madeMake sure that the settings are correct within your communication application.After making a call you can’t hear a ring Ensure that the communication application's tone or pule dialling selection feature is set correctly.You are also able to use the ATD command - please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for further information.
User’s Manual 8-23TroubleshootingLANCommunication is cut off unexpectedlyThe computer will automatically cut off communication when connection with the carrier is not successful for a set time interval - try lengthening this time interval within your communication application.ACONNECT display is quickly replaced by NOCARRIEREnsure that the communication application's error control feature is set correctly.You are also able to use the AT\N command - please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for further information.Character display becomes garbled during a communicationWhen transmitting data you should ensure that the parity bit and stop bit settings correspond with those of the remote computer - you should check the flow control and communication protocol settings within your communication application.You cannot receive an incoming callEnsure that the communication application's rings before auto answer feature is set correctly.You are also able to use the ATS0 command - please refer to Appendix D, S-registers for further information.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.Problem ProcedureProblem ProcedureCannot access LAN Check for a firm cable connection between the LAN jack and the LAN hub.Wake-up on LAN does not work Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off.If problems persist, consult your LAN administrator.
User’s Manual 8-24TroubleshootingWireless LANIf the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.BluetoothFor further information on Bluetooth wireless communication, please refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Problem ProcedureCannot access Wireless LANMake sure the computer's Wireless communication switch is set to on.If problems persist, contact your LAN administrator.Problem ProcedureCannot access Bluetooth deviceCheck to ensure the computer's Wireless Communication Switch is set to on.Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager application is running on the computer and that power to the external Bluetooth device is turned on.Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in Bluetooth hardware cannot operate simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller.If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual 8-25TroubleshootingRecovery DiscsDisposing of the computer and the computer's batteries■Discard this computer in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. For further information, contact your local government.■This computer contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash. ■Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local government authority for details regarding where to recycle old batteries or how to dispose of them properly.■If your hard disk drive or other storage media contains sensitive data, you should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove data from the media. These standard deletion procedures include:■Selecting Delete for a target file■Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin■Reformatting the media■Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD-ROMThe procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file management. This makes the file invisible to the operating system, but the data can still be read by specialized utilities. If you dispose of the computer, please delete all the data on its hard disk drive. Doing so prevents unauthorized use of such data. To ensure your data is not used for unauthorized purposes, you can:■Physically destroy the hard disk driveProblem ProcedureThe following message appears when executing Recovery Disc Creator."The Recovery Disc Creator can not be launched because there is no recovery partition."You will see this message if you have previously chosen to remove the partition and are trying to create "Recovery Media".When there is no recovery partition, the Recovery Disc Creator cannot make Recovery Media.However, if you have already created a "Recovery Media", you can use it to restore the recovery partition.Simply follow the instructions in Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Discs section in Chapter1, Getting Started.You will be directed to select "Restore Original Factory Image" from the drop-down menu.If you have not created "Recovery Media", please contact TOSHIBA support for assistance.
User’s Manual 8-26Troubleshooting■Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data■Take the hard disk drive to a professional deletion serviceAll data deletion costs will be borne by you.TOSHIBA supportIf you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for additional technical assistance.Before you callSome problems you experience may be related to software or the operating system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:■Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with your software and/or peripheral devices.■If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and consider calling the software company's technical support department for assistance.■Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer and/or software - they are your best resource for current information and support.Where to writeIf you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:Outside of Europe In EuropeAustraliaTOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.Information Systems Division Building C, 12-24 Talavera Rd, North Ryde, 2113, NSW, Australia.Germany & AustriaTOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH Geschäftsbereich, Deutschland-Österreich Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss, GermanyCanadaTOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.191 McNabb Street, Markham, Ontario L3R 8H2FranceTOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131, 92804 Puteaux CedexChinaTOSHIBA Personal Computer & Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.43F, Hong Kong New World Tower, No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road, Shanghai, P. R. China 200021NetherlandsTOSHIBA Information Systems, Benelux B.V.Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK Capelle a/d IJssel
User’s Manual 8-27TroubleshootingSingaporeTOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.438B Alexandra Road #06-01 Alexandra Technopark Singapore 119968SpainTOSHIBA Information Systems, ESPAÑAParque Empresarial San Fernando Edificio Europa, la Planta, Escalera A 28830 MadridUnited States of AmericaTOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine, California 92618 USAUnited KingdomTOSHIBA Information Systems (U.K.) Ltd.TOSHIBA Court Weybridge Business Park Addlestone Road Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2ULThe Rest of EuropeTOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbHGeschäftsbereich, Deutschland-Österreich Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss, GermanyOutside of Europe In Europe
User’s Manual A-1Appendix ASpecificationsThis appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.Physical DimensionsThis section summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.Physical DimensionsEnvironmental RequirementsWeight (typical)* 2.0 kilograms, configured with: 12.1"WXGA, 1,024 MB RAM, 80GB HDD, DVD Super Multi drive, LAN (1000M bps), Wireless LAN, modem, Tablet PC Pen.*Digitizer screen model equipped with UJ-862.Weight will vary with other configurations. Above weight is measured at specific criteria. It is not guaranteed as the maximum weight of the actual product.Size 305 (w) x 239 (d) x 37.4/39.4 (h) millimeters (not including parts that extend beyond the main body).Conditions Ambient temperature Relative humidityOperating 5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F) 20% to 80%Non-operating -20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 90%
User’s Manual A-2SpecificationsPower RequirementsBuilt-in ModemWet-bulb temperature 26°C maximum Conditions Altitude (from sea level)Operating -60 to 3,000 metersNon-operating -60 to 10,000 meters maximumAC adaptor 100-240 volts AC50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)Computer 15 V DC5.0 amperesThis information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.Network control unit (NCU)Type of NCU AAType of line Telephone line (analog only)Type of dialing PulseToneControl command AT commandsEIA-578 commandsMonitor function Computer’s speakerCommunication specificationsCommunication system Data: Full duplexFax: Half duplexCommunication protocol DataITU-T-Rec(Former CCITT)BellFaxITU-T-Rec(Former CCITT)V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32/V.32bis/V.34/V.90103/212AV.17/V.29/V.27ter/V.21 ch2
User’s Manual A-3SpecificationsCommunication speed Data transmission and reception 300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/33600 bpsData reception only with V.9028000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/56000 bpsFax2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bpsTransmitting level -10 dBmReceiving level -10 to -40 dBmInput/outputimpedance 600 ohms ±30%Error correcting MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42Data compression MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bisPower supply +3.3V (supplied by computer)
User’s Manual B-1Appendix BDisplay Controller and Video modeDisplay controllerThe display controller interprets software commands into hardware commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed at any one time. Therefore, software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode.Video modeVideo mode settings are configured via the Display Properties dialog.To open the Display Properties dialog, click Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display Settings.Due to the display panel's increased resolution, lines may appear broken in when displaying images in full-screen text mode.If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video playback and so on), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame dropping on your screen.If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is displayed properly. You could also disable Windows® Aero™to help correct this situation.
User’s Manual C-1Appendix CAT CommandsIn most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However, there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice commands are taken care of by application software.The format for entering AT commands is:ATXnwhere X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command. After you type in the command press ENTER.Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or numeric values known as result codes.All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are described in this section; any entry other than those listed results in an error.+++ Escape sequenceThe escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter on-line command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you finish, you can return to data mode using the ATO command.A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must be completed after an escape sequence is entered. This pause prevents the modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using register S2.This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.
User’s Manual C-2AT CommandsA/ Repeat last commandThis command repeats the last command string entered. Do not precede this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing ENTER.AAnswer commandThis command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an incoming call.Bn Communication standard settingThis command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.B0 Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps. B1 Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).B15 Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1,15,16ERROR OtherwiseDn DialThis command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not count. They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include them to make the number and modifiers easier to read.The following may be used as phone number modifiers:PPulse dialing.TTouch-tone dialing (default).,Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8 before processing the next character in the dial string.WWait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone beforeprocessing the dial string.@Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence afterdialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modemsends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.!Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5 seconds and then return to off-hook.;Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to command mode after dialing a number, without disconnecting the call.S=n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=Xcommand (See &Zn=X command for more information). The range is 0-3.
User’s Manual C-3AT CommandsEn Echo commandThis command controls whether or not the characters entered from your computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while the modem is in command mode.E0 Disables echo to the computer.E1 Enables echo to the computer (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR OtherwiseHn Hook controlThis command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call, or off-hook to make the phone line busy.H0 Modem goes on-hook (default).H1 Modem goes off-hook.Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR OtherwiseIn Request ID informationThis command displays product information about the modem.I0 Returns modem identity string and driver version number.I3 Same as I0.I9 Returns region ID in English.Result Codes:OK n=0,3,9ERROR OtherwiseLn Monitor speaker volumeThis command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.L0 Low volume.L1 Low volume. (Same as L0)L2 Medium volume (default).L3 High volume.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2,3ERROR OtherwiseMn Monitor speaker modeThis command turns the speaker on or off.M0 The speaker is off.M1 The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal (default).
User’s Manual C-4AT CommandsM2 The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.M3 Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when dialing.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2,3ERROR OtherwiseNn Modulation handshakeThis command controls whether or not the local modem performs a negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the communication speed of the two modems is different.N0 When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB command.N1 When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB command (default).During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be selected.Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR OtherwiseOn Return on-line to data modeO0 Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and return to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).O1 This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line data mode.O3 This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to on-line data mode.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,3ERROR OtherwiseP Select pulse dialingThis command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone) dialing. Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received. Tone dial is the default setting.Qn Result code controlResult codes are informational messages sent from the modem and displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK,CONNECT,RING,NOCARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the user to turn result codes on or off.Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the computer (default).
User’s Manual C-5AT CommandsQ1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR OtherwiseT Select tone dialingThis command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing. Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received. This is the default setting.Vn DCE response formatThis command controls whether result codes (including call progress and negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their numeric equivalents.V0 Displays result codes as digits.V1 Displays result codes as text (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR OtherwiseXn Result code selection, call progress monitoringThis command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.Command Dial tonedetectBusy signaldetectSupported Result CodeX0 Disable Disable OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERRORX1 Disable Disable OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, CONNECT <RATE>X2 Enable Disable OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NODIALTONE, CONNECT <RATE>X3 Disable Enable OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>, BLACKLISTEDX4 (default) Enable Enable OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>, DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTEDX5 Enable Enable OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>, RRING, NO BONGTONE, DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED
User’s Manual C-6AT CommandsDial tone detectDisabled: The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial tone.Enabled: The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds.Busy tone detectDisabled: The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.Enabled: The modem monitors for busy tones.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2,3,4,5ERROR OtherwiseZn Recall stored profileThe modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is specified, zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR Otherwise&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) controlData Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem. DCD normally turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal.&C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored. DCD circuit is always on.&C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR Otherwise&Dn DTR controlThis command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR signal and changes to the DTR signal.&D0 Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it as always on. This should only be used if your communication software does not provide DTR to the modem&D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode, the modem enters command mode, issues an OK resultcode, and remains connected.
User’s Manual C-7AT Commands&D2 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode, the modem disconnects (default).&D3 Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2,3ERROR Otherwise&F Load factory settingsThis command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the S-register settings in the active configuration with factory values.&F Recall factory setting as active configuration.&Gn V.22bis guard tone controlThis command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only used in V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North America and is for international use only.&G0 Guard tone disabled (default).&G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.&G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2ERROR Otherwise&Kn Local flow control selection&K0 Disable flow control.&K3 Enable CTS/RTS flow control (default).&K4 Enable XON/XOFF flow control.Result Codes:OK n=0,3,4ERROR Otherwise&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)&P0 Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second.&P1 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second.&P2 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second.Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2ERROR Otherwise
User’s Manual C-8AT Commands&Tn Self-test commandsThese tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data loss or random errors. &T0 Abort. Stops any test in progress.&T1 Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as well as the connection between the modem and computer. Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To work properly, the modem must be off-line.Result Codes:OK n=0CONNECT n=1ERROR Otherwise&V Display Current ConfigurationThis command displays the current configuration of the modem. If nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well.&V View profiles.&W Store current configurationSaves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers.The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated in the &V command. These settings are restored to the active configuration upon receiving a Zn command or at power up. Refer to the &V command.&W Stores the current configuration.&Zn=x Store telephone numberThis command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem’s nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the command is &Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which the number should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34 characters. The ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in location n.Result Codes:OK n=0, 1, 2, 3ERROR Otherwise\Nn Error control mode selectionThis command determines the type of error control used by the modem when sending or receiving data.\N0 Buffer mode. No error control.\N1 Direct mode.\N2 MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This is also known as MNP reliable mode.
User’s Manual C-9AT Commands\N3 V.42, MNP, or buffered (default).The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode. If this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is also known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).\N4 V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.\N5 V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).\N7 V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).Result Codes:OK n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7ERROR Otherwise\Qn Local flow control selection\Q0 Disable flow control.\Q1 XON/XOFF software flow control.\Q3 CTS/RTS to DTE (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1,3ERROR Otherwise\Vn Protocol result code\V0 Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.\V1 Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,1ERROR Otherwise%B View numbers in blacklistIf blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR result code appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.%Cn Data compression controlThis command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5 data compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs first.%C0 V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.%C3 V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled (default).Result Codes:OK n=0,3ERROR Otherwise
User’s Manual D-1Appendix DS-registersS-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions of the internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it hangs up if a connection fails. You can also customize certain AT commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination. The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose, however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually when the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable range, then an error is generated.This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.S-register valuesThe format for displaying the value of an S-register is:ATSn?where n is the register number. After you type in the register press ENTER.The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:ATSn=rwhere n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you type in the register and its new value press ENTER.This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.Some registers vary from one country/region to another.
User’s Manual D-2S-registersS0 Auto answer ring numberThis register determines the number of rings the modem will count before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled, the modem can only answer with an ATA command.Range:0-255Default:0Units:ringsS1 Ring counterThis register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with each ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register is cleared.Range:0-225Default:0Units:ringsS2 AT escape character (user defined)This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape sequence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode when on-line. Values greater than 127 disable the escape sequence.Range:0-255, ASCII decimalDefault:43Units:ASCIIS3 Command line termination character (user defined)This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return character. This character is used to end command lines and result codes.Range:0-127, ASCII decimalDefault:13 (carriage return)Units:ASCIIS4 Response formatting character (user defined)This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed character. The modem uses a line feed character in command mode when it responds to the computer.Range:0-127, ASCII decimalDefault:10 (line feed)Units:ASCII
User’s Manual D-3S-registersS5 Command line editing character (user defined)This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and pertains to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32 ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line. When the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the local DTE the backspace character, an ASCII space character, and a second backspace character. This means a total of three characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the backspace character.Range:0-127, ASCII decimalDefault:8 (backspace)Units:ASCIIS6 Wait before dialingThis register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem must wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit of the telephone number. The modem always pauses for a minimum of two seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two seconds. The wait for dial tone call progress feature (W dial modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6. This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options according to country/region restrictions. In some countries/regions, S6 will set dial tone detect time.Range:3-255Default:3Units:secondsS7 Connection completion time-outThis register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is started when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes off-hook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also specifies the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier in seconds. S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier.Range:1-255Default:50Units:seconds
User’s Manual D-4S-registersS8 Comma pause timeThis register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must pause when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string. In some countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and comma pause time.Range:0-255Default:2Units:secondsS11 DTMF dialing speedThis register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for each country/region. Range:50-255Default:95Units:.001 secondsS12 Escape guard timeThis register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the required pause after the escape sequence.Range:0-255Default:50Units:.02 secondsS37 Dial line rateS37 = 0 (default) maximum modem speedS37 = 1 reservedS37 = 2 1200/75 bpsS37 = 3 300 bpsS37 = 4 reservedS37 = 5 1200 bpsS37 = 6 2400 bpsS37 = 7 4800 bpsS37 = 8 7200 bpsS37 = 9 9600 bps
User’s Manual D-5S-registersAT command set result codesThe following table shows the result codes.The result code summaryS37 = 10 12000 bpsS37 = 11 14400 bpsS37 = 12 16800 bpsS37 = 13 19200 bpsS37 = 14 21600 bpsS37 = 15 24000 bpsS37 = 16 26400 bpsS37 = 17 28800 bpsS37 = 18 31200 bpsS37 = 19 33600 bpsResult Code Numeric DescriptionOK 0 Command executedCONNECT 1 Modem connected to lineRING 2 A ring signal has been detectedNO CARRIER 3 Modem lost carrier signal, or does not detect carrier signal, or does not detect answer toneERROR 4 Invalid commandCONNECT 1200 EC*15 Connection at 1200 bpsNO DIAL TONE 6 No dial tone detectedBUSY 7 Busy signal detectedNO ANSWER 8 No quiet answerCONNECT 2400 EC*110 Connection at 2400 bps
User’s Manual D-6S-registers*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending upon the error control method used:V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.V.42 - V.42 error control only.MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data compression.MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.NoEC - No error control protocol.*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.CONNECT 4800 EC*111 Connection at 4800 bpsCONNECT 9600 EC*112 Connection at 9600 bpsCONNECT 14400 EC*113 Connection at 14400 bpsCONNECT 19200 EC*114 Connection at 19200 bpsCONNECT 7200 EC*124 Connection at 7200 bpsCONNECT 12000 EC*125 Connection at 12000 bpsCONNECT 16800 EC*186 Connection at 16800 bpsCONNECT 300 EC*140 Connection at 300 bpsCONNECT 21600 EC*155 Connection at 21600 bpsCONNECT 24000 EC*156 Connection at 24000 bpsCONNECT 26400 EC*157 Connection at 26400 bpsCONNECT 28800 EC*158 Connection at 28800 bpsCONNECT 31200 EC*159 Connection at 31200 bpsCONNECT 33600 EC*160 Connection at 33600 bpsDELAYED*2 88 Delay is in effect for the dialed numberBLACKLISTED*2 89 Dialed number is blacklistedBLACKLIST FULL*2 90 Blacklist is full
User’s Manual E-1Appendix EV.90The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps (kilobits per second) when connected to an Internet service provider that supports V.90. As with any modem, the actual throughput (speed of data transfer) depends on analog telephone line conditions, which can vary considerably. Therefore, many users will experience throughput in the range of 28-50kbps under normal telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34 rate.V.90 modeThis information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in modem.V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host modem is connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90 connection.Function Transmission speedData V.90 From 56kbps (maximum) to 28kbps (minimum)Reception only
User’s Manual E-2V.90Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connectionNo. Result code Description70 CONNECT 32000 EC* Connection at 32000 bps72 CONNECT 36000 EC* Connection at 36000 bps74 CONNECT 40000 EC* Connection at 40000 bps76 CONNECT 44000 EC* Connection at 44000 bps78 CONNECT 48000 EC* Connection at 48000 bps80 CONNECT 52000 EC* Connection at 52000 bps82 CONNECT 56000 EC* Connection at 56000 bps100 CONNECT 28000 EC* Connection at 28000 bps101 CONNECT 29333 EC* Connection at 29333 bps102 CONNECT 30666 EC* Connection at 30666 bps103 CONNECT 33333 EC* Connection at 33333 bps104 CONNECT 34666 EC* Connection at 34666 bps105 CONNECT 37333 EC* Connection at 37333 bps106 CONNECT 38666 EC* Connection at 38666 bps107 CONNECT 41333 EC* Connection at 41333 bps108 CONNECT 42666 EC* Connection at 42666 bps109 CONNECT 45333 EC* Connection at 45333 bps110 CONNECT 46666 EC* Connection at 46666 bps111 CONNECT 49333 EC* Connection at 49333 bps112 CONNECT 50666 EC* Connection at 50666 bps113 CONNECT 53333 EC* Connection at 53333 bps114 CONNECT 54666 EC* Connection at 54666 bps
User’s Manual E-3V.90 * EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when theextended result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending on the error control method used.AT CommandV42bis V.42 error control and V.42bis data compressionV42 V.42 error control onlyNoEC No error control protocol-V90=* V.90 Dial Line Rate-V90 sets the maximum V.90 downstream that the modem attempts to connect.-V90=0 V.90 disabled-V90=1 V.90 enabled: automatic speed selection - maximum modem speed (default)
User’s Manual F-1Appendix FWireless LANThis appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up and running, with a minimum of parameters.Card SpecificationsForm Factor PCI Express Mini CardCompatibility ■IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS■Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Network OperatingSystem■Microsoft Windows® NetworkingMedia AccessProtocol■CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgment (ACK)
User’s Manual F-2Wireless LANRadio CharacteristicsRadio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:■Country/region where the product was purchased■Type of productWireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations. Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment. The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may travel larger distances.■The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.■Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.Refer to the “Information sheet” for regulatory information that may apply in your country/region.R-F Frequency ■Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision A, n Draft 2.0)■Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision B, G, n Draft 2.0)
User’s Manual F-3Wireless LANSupported Frequency Sub-bandsSubject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels. Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B, G and n Draft 2.0)*1 Factory-set default channels*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as follows:■For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between different access points the station can dynamically switch to another channel if required.■For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.Frequency Range Channel ID 2400-2483.5 MHz12412224173242242427524326243772442824479245210 2457*111 246212 2467*213 2472*2
User’s Manual F-4Wireless LAN■In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the Wireless LAN Access Point device.Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A and n Draft 2.0)Frequency Range Channel ID 5150-5850 MHz 34 5170*236 5180*238 5190*240 5200*242 5210*244 5220*246 5230*248 5240*252 5260*256 5280*260 5300*264 5320*2100 5500*2104 5520*2108 5540*2112 5560*2116 5580*2120 5600*2124 5620*2128 5640*2132 5660*2136 5680*2140 5700*2149 5745*2153 5765*2157 5785*2
User’s Manual F-5Wireless LAN*1 Factory-set default channels*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as follows:■For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between different access points the station can dynamically switch to another channel if required.■For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.■In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the Wireless LAN Access Point device.161 5805*2165 5825*2
User’s Manual G-1Appendix GIntel® Matrix Storage ManagerIf you are installing the operating system on a computer system which is configured for AHCI mode, you must pre-install the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager driver using the F6 installation method described in the Manually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®) or Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP) sections.If you have already installed the operating system on a system configured for AHCI mode, double-click iata_cd.exe and respond to each of the prompts in order to install the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager.All installed files (readme.txt, help, etc.) are copied to the following path by default:<bootdrive>\Program Files\Intel\Intel Matrix Storage ManagerManually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®)Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating system.Before Setting up WindowsBefore setting up Windows, create an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk.Creating an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.This model does not support RAID functionality.
User’s Manual G-2Intel® Matrix Storage ManagerWindows Setup Procedure1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the above disk.2. Insert the Windows Setup DVD into the optical disc drive and boot the computer from the DVD. The Windows Setup program will start.3. Carry out the setup process by following the instructions displayed on the setup screen. When the message "Which type of installation do you want?" appears, select Custom(advanced).4. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"appears, click Load Driver.5. Click the Browse button and then select Floppy Disk Drive(A:).6. Select "Intel(R) 82801GBM SATA AHCI Controller" from the list that appear, and click Next.7. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"appears again, select the destination drive and then click Next.8. Continue to follow the onscreen instructions to finish installing windows.Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP)Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating system.Before Setting up WindowsBefore setting up Windows, create an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk.Creating the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.Windows Setup Procedure1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the disk created in the previous step.2. Insert the Windows Setup CD-ROM into the optical disc drive and boot the computer up from the CD. The Windows Setup program will start.■Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are used.■Errors may occur in the following situations:■When using applications which directly access the hardware and read from or write to the hard disk drive.■When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.
User’s Manual G-3Intel® Matrix Storage Manager3. When the message "Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver" appears on the screen, press the F6 key.4. When the message "Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s):" appears on the screen, press the S key.5. Select "Intel(R) 82801GBM SATA AHCI Controller" and press the ENTER key.6. Follow the onscreen instructions to continue setting up windows.How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP or Windows Vista®:To install this software on Windows XP or Windows Vista® logon with an account that has administrator user privileges.1. Double-click the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager setup file ("iata_cd.exe") located in the C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage Manager folder.2. Follow the onscreen installation instructions.3. Restart the system.■Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are used.■Errors may occur in the following situations:■When using applications which directly access the hardware and read from or write to the hard disk drive.■When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.
User’s Manual H-1Appendix HBluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityBluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:■Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.0+EDR, as defined and approved by The Bluetooth Special Interest Group.■Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The Bluetooth Special interest Group.
User’s Manual H-2Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability■Bluetooth wireless technology is a new innovative technology, and TOSHIBA has not confirmed compatibility of its Bluetooth™ products with all computers and/or equipment using Bluetooth wireless technology other than TOSHIBA portable computers.Always use Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA in order to enable wireless networks over two or more (up to a total of seven) TOSHIBA portable computers using these cards. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on Web sitehttp://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe orhttp://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more information.■When you use Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency, move your computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop transmitting from your computer. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on Web site http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe orhttp://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more information.■Bluetooth™ and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use Bluetooth™ and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or even lose your network connection.If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either one of your Bluetooth™ or Wireless LAN. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on web site http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe orhttp://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more information.
User’s Manual H-3Bluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityBluetooth wireless technology and your HealthThe products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones.Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature.In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may for example include:■Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of airplanes, or■In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful.If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.Regulatory statementsGeneralThis product complies with any mandatory product specification in any country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies with the following.European Union (EU) and EFTAThis equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has been provided with the CE mark accordingly.Canada - Industry Canada (IC)This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
User’s Manual H-4Bluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityL ‘ utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prét à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:■Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna■Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.■Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.■Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth™Adaptor from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.
User’s Manual H-5Bluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityCaution: Exposure to Radio Frequency RadiationThe radiated output power of the Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Bluetooth™Adaptor from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The antenna(s) used in this device are located beneath the palm rest, and this device has been tested as a portable device as defined in Section 2.1093 of FCC rules. In addition, Bluetooth has been tested with Wireless LAN transceiver for co-location requirements. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.TaiwanArticle 12 Without permission granted by the DGT or NCC, any company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original characteristic as well as performance to an approved low power radio-frequency devices.Article 14 The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, the user shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved.The said legal communications means radio communications is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio wave radiated devices.
User’s Manual H-6Bluetooth wireless technology InteroperabilityUsing Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in JapanIn Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station and specified low-power radio station).1. StickerPlease put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.2. IndicationThe indication shown below appears on this equipment.(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.(4) This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz. It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems.The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate within the same range as industrial devices, scientific devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not interfere with any of the equipment listed above.2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio stations, promptly change the frequency being used, change the location of use, or turn off the source of emissions.3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.
User’s Manual H-7Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability3. TOSHIBA Direct PCDevice AuthorizationThis device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications Business Law.The Name of the radio equipment: EYTFXCSJAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENTApproval Number: D07-0040001The following restrictions apply:Do not disassemble or modify the device.Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.Monday - Friday : 10:00-17:00Toll Fr ee Tel : 0120-15-1048Direct Dial : 03-3457-4850FAX : 03-3457-4868
User’s Manual I-1Appendix IAC Power Cord and ConnectorsThe power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following specifications:Certification agenciesLength: Minimum 1.7 metersWire size: Minimum 0.75 mm2Current rating: Minimum 2.5 amperesVoltage rating: 125 or 250 VAC (depending on country/region’s power standards)U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certifiedNo. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2Australia: ASJapan: DENANHOEurope:Austria: OVE Italy: IMQBelgium: CEBEC The Netherlands: KEMADenmark: DEMKO Norway: NEMKO
User’s Manual I-2AC Power Cord and ConnectorsIn Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VV-F.For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 2-15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 6-15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.Finland: FIMKO Sweden: SEMKOFrance: LCIE Switzerland: SEVGermany: VDE United Kingdom: BSIUSA United KingdomAS approved Approved by theBS approvedUL approvedCSA approvedappropriate agencyAustralia EuropeCanada
User’s Manual J-1Appendix JTOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer This feature allows you to set up a timer-activated BIOS password that will prevent unauthorised system access in the event of theft.When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain access to the system.To set permissions and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.■If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not, enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.■If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered, enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.■The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can be set from 1 to 28 days.■Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly modified.■If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.
User’s Manual K-1Appendix KLegal FootnotesThis chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.Non-applicable Icons*1Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that your selected model may not have all the features and specifications corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer chassis.CPU*2Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance Legal Footnotes.CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications under the following conditions:■use of certain external peripheral products■use if battery power instead of AC power ■use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video applications■use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections■use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided design applications■use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously■use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000 meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)
User’s Manual K-2Legal Footnotes■use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C (41°F to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model - please refer to your computer documentation or visit the Toshiba website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design configuration.Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost data or damage to the product when used outside recommended conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum performance, use your computer product only under recommended conditions. Read additional restrictions under "Environmental Conditions" in your computer documentation.Contact Toshiba Technical Service and Support for more information.64-Bit Computing64-bit processors are designed to take advantage of 32 and 64 bit computing.64-bit computing requires that the following hardware and software requirements are met:■64-bit Operating System■64-bit CPU, Chipset and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)■64-bit Device drivers■64-bit applicationsCertain device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a 64-bit CPU and therefore may not function properly. A 32-bit version of the operating system is preinstalled on your computer unless explicitly stated that the operating system is 64-bit.Memory (Main System)*3Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other factors. For computer's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full system memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and will vary by model and system configuration.
User’s Manual K-3Legal FootnotesBattery Life*4Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model, configuration, applications, power management settings and features utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not charge while computer is consuming full power. After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced. This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*51 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems, such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.LCD*6Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic characteristic of LCD technology.Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode. Screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on product model, design configuration, applications, power management settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when operating in battery power mode.Total Available Graphics Memory is the total of, as applicable, Dedicated Video Memory, System Video Memory and Shared System Memory. Shared System Memory will vary depending on system memory size and other factors.
User’s Manual K-4Legal FootnotesWireless LAN*8The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.The wireless AGN (802.11a/g/n) adapter is based on a draft release version of the IEEE 802.11n specification and; may not be compatible with, or support all features (e.g., security) of, certain Wi-Fi® equipment.Copy Protection*9Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.Images*10All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.
User’s Manual Glossary-1GlossaryThe terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate naming is included for reference.AbbreviationsAC: alternating currentANSI: American National Standards InstituteASCII: American Standard Code for Information InterchangeBIOS: basic input output systembps: bits per secondCD: compact discCD-ROM: Compact Disc-Read Only Memory CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritableCMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductorCPU: central processing unitCRT: cathode ray tubeDC: direct currentDDC: display data channelDDR: double data rateDIMM: dual inline memory moduleDMA: direct memory accessDOS: disk operating systemDVD: digital versatile discDVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-RecordableDVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access MemoryDVD-R (Dual Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual LayerDVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only MemoryDVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritableDVD+R (Double Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double LayerECP: extended capabilities portFDD: floppy diskette driveFIR: fast infraredGB: gigabyteHDD: hard disk drive
User’s Manual Glossary-2GlossaryIDE: integrated drive electronicsIEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics EngineersI/O: input/outputIRQ: interrupt requestKB: kilobyteLCD: liquid crystal displayLED: light emitting diodeLSI: large scale integrationMB: megabytePC: personal computerPCI: peripheral component interconnectRAM: random access memoryRGB: red, green, and blueROM: read only memoryRTC: real time clockSCSI: small computer system interfaceSIO: serial input/outputSDRAM: synchronous dynamic random access memoryTFT: thin-film transistorUART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitterUSB: Universal Serial BusUXGA: ultra extended graphics arrayVGA: video graphics array VRT: voltage reduction technologyWXGA: wide extended graphics arrayXGA: extended graphics arrayAadaptor: A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar electronic devices. For example, the AC adaptor modifies the power from a wall outlet for use by the computer. This term also refers to the add-in circuit cards that control external devices, such as video monitors and magnetic tape devices. allocate: To assign a space or function for a specific task.alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow at regular intervals. analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.
User’s Manual Glossary-3GlossaryANSI: American National Standards Institute. An organization established to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines. For example, ANSI defined the ASCII standard and other information processing requirements.antistatic: A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity.application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word processing and games.ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used letters, numbers, and symbols.async: Short for asynchronous.asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted at regular time intervals.Bbackup: A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is destroyed.batch file: A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing a sequence of operating system commands or executable files. binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See alsoASCII.BIOS: Basic Input Output System. The firmware that controls data flow within the computer. See also firmware.bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See alsobyte.board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components, called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the capabilities of the system.boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer. The program reads instructions from a storage device into the computer’s memory.bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission speed of a modem.buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow from one device to another.bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.
User’s Manual Glossary-4Glossarybyte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the system.Ccache memory: High speed memory which stores data that increases processor speed and data transfer rate. When the CPU reads data from main memory, it stores a copy of this data in cache memory. The next time the CPU needs that same data, it looks for it in the cache memory rather than the main memory, which saves time. The computer has two cache levels. Level one is incorporated into the processor and level two resides in external memory.capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage device such as a floppy diskette or hard disk drive. It is usually described in terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes, megabytes (MB), where one MB = 1024 KB and gigabytes (GB), where one GB = 1024 MB.card: Synonym for board. See board.CardBus: An industry standard bus for 32-bit PC Cards.CD-ROM: A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser, rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read many times. See also CD-ROM.CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times. See also CD-ROM.character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the computer. Also synonymous with byte.chassis: The frame containing the computer.chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other chips.CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power. Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly packaged and are highly reliable.cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and communication ports.commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.communications: The means by which a computer transmits and receives data to and from another computer or device. See serial interface.
User’s Manual Glossary-5Glossarycompatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data or the media upon which it is being transferred.2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with another system or component.components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole (system).computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that enable it to achieve a desired result.computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and peripheral components assembled to process data into useful information.configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your system configuration.control keys: A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to initiate a particular function within a program.controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to intensive math calculations.CPS: Characters Per Second. Typically used to indicate the transmission speed of a printer.CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets and executes instructions.CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the television set.cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current position on the display screen.Ddata: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer can process, store, or retrieve.data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits (binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer can generate 256 unique characters.DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of power is usually supplied by batteries.default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset value.
User’s Manual Glossary-6Glossarydelete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device. Synonymous with erase.device driver: A program that controls communication between a specific peripheral device and the computer.dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or record other information.disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates the disk at high speed past a read-write head.disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view computer output.documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for the users of a computer system or application. Computer system documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information as well as system functions. DOS: Disk Operating System. See operating system.driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device such as a printer or mouse).DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a high-capacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.DVD-R (Dual Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD-R storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The DVD-RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity, high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.DVD+R (Double Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD+R storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The DVD-RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.
User’s Manual Glossary-7GlossaryEecho: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then retransmits the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.erase: See delete.escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as printers and modems. 2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to the modem.execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.Extended Capability Port: An industry standard that provides a data buffer, switchable forward and reverse data transmission, and run length encoding (RLE) support.Ffast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps. file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs, or both.fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint.firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and directs a microprocessor’s activities.floppy diskette: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data. floppy diskette drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes to floppy diskettes.Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to perform certain functions.Ggigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See alsomegabyte.
User’s Manual Glossary-8Glossarygraphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs, to present information.Hhard disk: A non-removable disk usually referred to as drive C. The factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it for servicing. Also called fixed disk.hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes a hard disk. See also hard disk.hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives, etc. See also software and firmware.hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.hexadecimal: The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F.host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits information to a device or another computer.hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with the extended function key, FN, can be used to set system parameters, such as speaker volume.HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various hardware components.Iicon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can manipulate.i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly from external devices such as digital video cameras.input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending computer is input for the receiving computer.instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a particular task.interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used specifically to connect one system or device to another. 2) To physically connect one system or device to another to exchange information. 3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the processor.I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a computer.
User’s Manual Glossary-9GlossaryI/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and transfer data to and from it.Jjumper: A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit.KK: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and kilobyte.KB: See kilobyte.keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character marked on the key.kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte and megabyte.Llevel 2 cache: See cache memory.Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light when a current is applied.Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewing-side coating is etched into character forming segments with leads that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.LSI: Large Scale Integration. 1) A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100,000 simple logic gates on a single chip. 2) An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration.Mmain board: See motherboard.megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See alsokilobyte.megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. See also hertz.menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen. Also called a screen.
User’s Manual Glossary-10Glossarymicroprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.mode: A method of operation, for example, the Boot Mode, Sleep Mode or the Hibernation Mode.modem: Derived from modulator/demodulator, a device that converts (modulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines and then converts modulated data (demodulates) to digital format where received.monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions. Sometimes called a main board.MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality transmission and real-time playback of sound files.Nnon-system disk: A formatted floppy diskette you can use to store programs and data but you cannot use to start the computer. Seesystem disk.nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable of permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power off does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and page movement.OOCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a storage device.online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to receive or transmit data.operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral devices.output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates data. 1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.
User’s Manual Glossary-11GlossaryPparity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values (integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1. 2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can be set to none, odd, or even.password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user. The computer provides various levels of password protection such as user and supervisor.pel: The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software. Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels. See pixel.peripheral component interconnect: An industry standard 32-bit bus.peripheral device: An I/O device that is external to the central processor and/or main memory such as a printer or a mouse.pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display or printer. Also called a pel.plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to automatically recognize connections of external devices and make the necessary configurations in the computer.port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and receives data to and from devices or other computers.Power Saver: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various power-saving functions.printed circuit board (PCB): A hardware component of a processor to which integrated circuits and other components are attached. The board itself is typically flat and rectangular, and constructed of fiberglass, to form the attachment surface.program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to achieve a desired result. See also application.prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or requires information or an action from you.RRadio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B computing device regulations.Random Access Memory (RAM): High speed memory within the computer circuitry that can be read or written to.restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called "warm boot" or "soft reset"). See also boot.
User’s Manual Glossary-12GlossaryRGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green, and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.RJ45: A modular LAN jack.ROM: Read Only Memory: A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to contain information that controls the computer’s basic operation. You cannot access or change information stored in ROM.SSCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.SD/SDHC Card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants.serial communications: A communications technique that uses as few as two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another.serial interface: Refer to a type of information exchange that transmits information sequentially, one bit at a time.SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data transmission.soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard, change some configuration options, stop program execution, and access the numeric keypad overlay.software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities. See also hardware.stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or group codes in asynchronous serial communications.subpixel: Three elements, one red, one green and blue (RGB), that make up a pixel on the color LCD. The computer sets subpixels independently, each may emit a different degree of brightness. Seealso pixel.synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits, characters or events.system disk: A disk that has been formatted with an operating system. You can boot a computer using a system disk. Also called an operating system disk or bootable disk.Tterminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to the computer for data input/output.TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor (TFT) to drive each cell.
User’s Manual Glossary-13GlossaryTouch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer palm rest.TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A logic circuit design that uses switching transistors for gates and storage.UUniversal Serial Bus: This serial interface lets you communicate with several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the computer.VVGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets you run any popular software.volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information as long as power is supplied to the computer.Wwarm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application, document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows window.Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless communication.Wireless WAN: Wide Area Network (WAN) through wireless communication.write protection: A method for protecting a floppy diskette from accidental erasure.
User’s Manual Index-1IndexAAC adaptor 3-3additional 3-45connecting 1-4ASCII characters 5-7BBatterycharging 6-7extending life 6-10indicator 2-13, 6-4monitoring capacity 6-8real time clock 3-3, 6-6save mode 3-7types 6-5Battery pack 2-8, 3-2additional 3-45replacing 6-10BIOS Setup 7-8Bluetooth 3-5, 4-48Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba 3-11problems 8-24Boot Priority 7-3Bridge media slot 2-4, 3-18indicator 2-14using 3-18CCleaning the computer 4-52Cooling vents 2-3DDC IN indicator 2-13, 6-4Display 3-4automatic power off 3-7brightness down 5-4brightness up 5-4controller B-1hinge 2-11opening 1-6screen 2-10Docking port 2-7Documentation list 1-2DVD Super Multi driveproblems 8-9using 4-29writing 4-33EEquipment checklist 1-1External monitor 2-6, 3-37problems 8-21FFingerprint Sensorlocation 2-9problems 8-16using 4-17Floppy diskette care 4-40FN + 1 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility reduce) 5-5FN + 2 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility enlarge) 5-5FN + ENTER 5-3FN + ESC (Mute) 5-3FN + F1 (Lock) 5-3FN + F10 (Arrow Mode) 5-3FN + F11 (Numeric Mode) 5-3FN + F12 (ScrLock) 5-3FN + F2 (Power Plan) 5-3FN + F3 (Sleep) 5-4
User’s Manual Index-2IndexFN + F4 (Hibernate) 5-4FN + F5 (Output) 5-4FN + F6 (Brightness Down) 5-4FN + F7 (Brightness Up) 5-4FN + F8 (Wireless) 5-4FN + F9 (Touch Pad) 5-4FN + space (Zoom) 5-4FN + Tab (ODD) 5-5Function keys 5-2GGraphics controller 3-4HHard disk drive 3-3automatic power off 3-7installing 3-34removing 3-33Hard Disk Drive indicator 2-13HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) 3-33, 3-45HDD Protection 4-53Heat dispersal 3-8, 4-55Hibernation Mode 1-10, 3-8Hot keys 3-7, 5-3Brightness Down 5-4Brightness Up 5-4Hibernate 5-4Lock 5-3Mute 5-3ODD 5-5Output 5-4Power Plan 5-3Sleep 5-4TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge) 5-5TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce) 5-5Touch Pad 5-4Wireless 5-4Zoom 5-4HW Setupaccessing 7-1Boot priority 7-3CPU 7-6device config 7-7display 7-2general 7-2keyboard 7-5LAN 7-6USB 7-7window 7-1Ii.LINK 2-2, 3-41connecting 3-42disconnecting 3-42precautions 3-41problems 8-22Indicators 2-13KKeyboard 5-1emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2FN Sticky key 5-5Function keys F1...F12 5-2Hot keys 5-3problems 8-7typewriter keys 5-1Windows special keys 5-5Keypad overlay 3-7Arrow Mode 5-6Numeric Mode 5-6temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on) 5-7temporarily using overlay (overlay off) 5-7turning on the overlays 5-6LLAN 3-5, 4-50active indicator 2-6cable types 4-50connecting 4-51disconnecting 4-52jack 2-6Link indicator 2-6problems 8-23MMedia care 4-40Card care 3-20CD/DVDs 4-40Floppy diskettes 4-40Memory card care 3-21Memory 3-2
User’s Manual Index-3Indexadditional 3-45installing 3-24, 3-29problems 8-19removing 3-28, 3-31Memory Stick 3-19problems 8-12Modem 3-5, 4-43connecting 4-45disconnecting 4-46jack 2-5problems 8-22properties menu 4-44region selection 4-44Moving the computer 4-52MultiMediaCard 3-19problems 8-13PPasswordpower on 3-7problems 8-7Starting the computer by 6-17Supervisor 6-17user 6-15PC Card 3-15inserting 3-15problems 8-11removing 3-16Pointing Deviceproblems 8-13Tablet PC Pen 4-3Touch Pad 2-11, 4-2Touch Pad control buttons 2-11, 4-2Touch Pad location 2-9using 4-1Powerconditions 6-1Hibernation Mode 1-10indicator 2-13, 6-5panel on/off 3-7, 6-19Shut Down mode (Boot Mode) 1-7Sleep Mode 1-8System Auto Off 6-19turning off 1-7turning on 1-7ProblemsAC power 8-5Additional memory module 8-19Analyzing the problem 8-2Battery 8-5Bluetooth 8-24DVD Super Multi drive 8-9External monitor 8-21Fingerprint Sensor 8-16Hard disk drive 8-8Hardware and system checklist 8-3i.LINK (IEEE1394) device 8-22Internal display panel 8-8Keyboard 8-7LAN 8-23Memory Stick 8-12Modem 8-22MultiMediaCard 8-13Overheating power down 8-4Password 8-7PC Card 8-11Pointing device 8-13Power 8-4Real Time Clock 8-7Recovery Discs 8-25SD/SDHC Card 8-11Self test 8-4Smart Card 8-11Sound system 8-20System start-up 8-4TOSHIBA support 8-26Touch Pad 8-13USB device 8-17USB floppy diskette drive 8-10USB mouse 8-15Wireless LAN 8-24xD picture card 8-12Processor 3-1RRecovery Discs 1-15problems 8-25Recovery hard disk drive 1-14Restarting the computer 1-11SSD/SDHC Cardproblems 8-11Security lock 3-44
User’s Manual Index-4Indexlocation 2-3Sleep Mode 1-8System automatic 3-7Slice Expansion Battery 3-45, 6-5Slice Expansion Battery adaptor 3-45Smart Card 3-16inserting 3-17problems 8-11removing 3-18Soft keysenhanced keyboard 5-2ENTER 5-3ScrLock 5-3Sound systemheadphone jack 2-2microphone 2-12microphone jack 2-2problems 8-20Stereo speakers 2-11volume control dial 2-2TTOSHIBA Assist 3-12TOSHIBA Assist button 3-6TOSHIBA ConfigFree 3-12TOSHIBA Disc Creator 3-12, 4-38TOSHIBA DVD-RAM Utility 3-12TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator 3-43, 3-46TOSHIBA HDD Protection 3-8, 4-53TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 3-9TOSHIBA Presentation button 3-6TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility 3-11TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format 3-11TOSHIBA Value Added Package 3-9TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 3-9UUltra Slim Bay 2-5changing modules 4-26HDD Adaptor 3-36location of slot 2-4options 3-46USB 3-38USB deviceproblems 8-17USB FDD Kit 3-38USB floppy diskette driveproblems 8-10VVideo mode B-1Video RAM 3-2Volume control dial 2-2WWeb Camera 3-5, 4-25Windows Mobility Center 3-13Wireless communication 4-47indicator 2-14, 4-50Wireless communication switch 2-1, 4-49Wireless LAN 3-6, 4-47problems 8-24Wireless WAN 3-6XxD picture card 3-19problems 8-12

Navigation menu